NIKKI AC SERVO CONTROLLER

Ｎ Ｅ Ｘ Ｓ ＲＴ

Ｎ Ｃ Ｓ － Ｆ Ｉ ＴＹＰＥ
Ｎ Ｃ Ｓ － Ｆ Ｓ ＴＹＰＥ
＜ＶＯ Ｌ Ｕ Ｍ Ｅ ： Ｂ Ａ Ｓ Ｉ Ｃ Ｆ Ｕ Ｎ Ｃ Ｔ Ｉ Ｏ Ｎ＞

ＩＮＳＴＲＵＣＴＩＯＮ ＭＡＮＵＡＬ
Ｖｅｒ．１．２

NIKKI DENSO CO.,LTD.

Manual No. TIE-12400B

 Preface
Thank you for adopting Nikki Dedicated Function Control AC Servo Controller
＜ＮＥＸＳＲＴ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ series＞.

＜ＮＥＸＳＲＴ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ series＞ is a high performance and multi-function

controller, high speed and very accurate full digital AC servo combined with 1 axis NC
which was developed by our long term experience of servo know-how, and sophisticated /
latest technology.

Using the function and performance effectively which conventional units do not have,
new function can be available to your machine system, consequently additional value
will be increased.

【Notice of this manual】

This instruction manual explains about installation, wiring, operation, maintenance,

trouble diagnosis, shooting, and etc. of the AC servo controller, NCS-FI/FS series .
In order for you to use this unit properly, please deeply understand the contents of
this manual.
At the time of installation, wiring, operation, maintenance, etc., please follow the
conditions and guidance procedure of this manual.
As for setting and display contents of an applied controller, please refer to the separate
instruction manual (Volume Dedicated Function).
Description in the instruction manual (Volume Dedicated Function) is prior to the same item
description of this manual if both are not identical.

【Warranty period】

Warranty period of our product is 1 year after shipping from our factory.
However please note that any failure or abnormality resulting from the following causes
is not covered by our warranty.

① Modification by parties other than NIKKI DENSO

② None standard operation different from the description in our manual.
③ Natural disasters
④ Connection with an other maker's unit not approved by us.

When you find a failure or an abnormality during the warranty period, please contact
our sales man.

When you receive the ordered units, please immediately check outlook of them and presence
of accessories.
At unpacking if outlook of units is abnormal, non-specified accessories are found, or
quantity is wrong, please do not use them and inform the results to our sales man.

※ NIKKI DENSO retains the right to revise this publication no matter how it is altered.
Although the information from NIKKI DENSO is reliable, NIKKI DENSO will not assume
responsibility whatever results may arise from the use of this information unless specially
guaranteed by NIKKI DENSO.
 Cautions for Safety

Before conducting installation, running, maintenance, and inspection, please deeply

understand this manual, and all associated manuals / materials as well as the knowledge of
all the applied equipment and information for safety and then use this unit properly.

In this manual, cautions for safety are ranked as『Danger』and『Caution』.

And cautions for handling are divided into 『Prohibition』and 『Compulsion』which are
defined (Action not to be done) and (Action to be done.), respectively.

Danger ：If mis-handling is made, dangerous situation as death or serious

injury could occur.

Caution ：If mis-handling is made, dangerous situation as medium or light

injury and mechanical damage could occur.

However, (Caution) marked item could cause serious results depending on the actual
situation. Since both of the above description include important contents, please be
sure to follow them.

：Prohibited action

Prohibition If this caution is ignored, this unit does not perform properly.

：Compulsory action

Compulsion If this is ignored, this unit does not perform properly.

【Cautions when using unit】

Danger
☆ Since electric shock and injury may occur, please comply with the following
suggestions.
① Never touch inside of this unit (AC servo controller) and terminal blocks.
『Electric shock may occur.』
② Be sure to make grounding of an earth terminal or lead wire of this unit
(AC servo controller).
Use larger earth cables for JIS Class 3 or better grounding.
『Electric shock may occur.』
③ Transportation, wiring, maintenance, and inspection shall be conducted stipulated
time after confirming complete lit off condition of front panel display, by power off.
『Electric shock may occur.』
④ Do not damage, force excessively, put on heavy thing, or nip cables.
『Electric shock may occur.』
⑤ Never touch rotating section of a running motor.
『Injury may occur.』

Caution
① Use specified motor and this unit (AC servo controller).
『Fire or failure may occur.』
② Never use in the atmosphere such as water splash, corrosive or low flashing point
gas and near flammable things.
『Fire or failure may occur.』
③ Since temperature of a motor, this unit (AC servo controller), and peripherals
raises quite high, do not touch them.
『Burn of a worker may occur.』
④ In supplying power, or for a while after shutting power off, since a radiator, a
regenerative unit, a motor etc. could be very hot, do not touch them.
『Burn of a worker may occur.』

【Receiving and checking of packages】

Caution
① When you receive ordered units, please check contents. if wrong thing is found or
quantity is wrong, please do not use them and inform the status to our sales man.
『Electric shock, injury, damage or failure may occur.』
② If packages of our products are broken, do not un-pack them and inform the fact to
our sales man.
『Electric shock, injury, damage or failure may occur.』

【Storage】

Prohibition
① Do not store units in a place of raining, water dripping, and harmful gas / liquid.
 Compulsion
① Store units in a place of no sun-shine but controlled temperature / humidity
within specified range.
② If storage term became quite long, please consult purchased or nearest sales
office before using them.

【Transportation】

Caution
① Do not hold a cable and a motor shaft during transporting units.
『Injury or failure may occur.』

Compulsion
① Comply with proper suggestion and avoid excess amount transportation which may
break the whole package.

【Installation】

Caution
① Do not climb or put any heavy thing on this unit.
『Injury or failure may occur.』
② Do not disturb or choke intake / outlet air holes with foreign thing.
『Fire may occur.』
③ Use specified direction for installation.
『Fire or failure may occur.』
④ Keep specified distance between this unit and control panel inside or other
equipment.
『Fire or failure may occur.』
⑤ Never apply heavy shock to this unit.
『This unit may be damaged.』
⑥ Conduct proper attachment suitable for the output or weight of this unit.
『This unit may be damaged.』
⑦ Attach this unit to non-flammable thing as metal.
『Fire may occur.』

【Wiring】

Caution
① Be sure to conduct correct wiring.
『Running away, burning of a motor, injury or fire may occur.』
② To prevent this unit from noise influence, use specified length treated
(shielded / twisted, etc.) cables.
『Running away of a motor, injury or machine damage may occur.』
③ To prevent this unit (NC servo controller) from noise influence, use separate
control I/O cables of the unit from other power cables.
『Running away of a motor, injury or machine damage may occur.』
④ To avoid electric shock and noise influence, be sure to make proper grounding
(earthing).
『Running away of a motor, electric shock, injury or machine damage may occur.』
【Operation・Run】

Caution
① There is no applicable protection to motors. For the protection, over-current
protector, earth leakage breaker, over-heat protector, and emergency stop device
shall be provided.
『Injury or fire may occur.』
② Confirm that power source specification is correct.
『Injury, fire or machine damage may occur.』
③ At test run, fix a motor to a place separating from its machine system and
confirm the motion, then connect the motor to the machine.
『Injury or machine damage may occur.』
④ Since the brake is only for holding machine position, do not use it for safety
system of your machine.
『Injury or machine damage may occur.』
⑤ Since excess adjustment change may cause this unit unstable, avoid this situation.
『Injury or machine damage may occur.』
⑥ When an alarm occurs, eliminate the cause, reset the alarm and then resume this
unit.
『Injury or machine damage may occur.』
⑦ When power recovers from black out status, since sudden restart may occur, do not
approach the machine.
（Machine system design shall be considered to maintain safety of workers against
the restart.）
『Injury may occur.』

Prohibition
① Do not apply power in the motor turning or vibrating status.
『Running away of a motor, injury or machine damage may occur.』
② Since the brake installed on a motor is only for holding, do not use it for actual
braking.

Compulsion
① Provide external shut down circuit in order to stop running and shut the power
off, immediately.

【Maintenance・Inspection】

Caution
① Capacity of condensers in the power line will be deteriorated.
To prevent secondary damage caused by condenser failure, we recommend to replace
them for about every 5 years.
『Failure may occur.』
② Cooling efficiency of a cooling motor will be deteriorated as time going.
To prevent secondary damage caused by condenser failure, we recommend to replace
them for about every 5 years.
『Failure may occur.』

Prohibition
① Overhaul / repair shall be conducted only by us or suggested shop.
 Contents Page
Chapter １ Outline
１−１ Features ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ １−１
１−２ Types ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ １−２
１−３ System configuration ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ １−３
Chapter ２ Specification
２−１ Types ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ２−１
２−２ General Specification ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ２−１
２−３ Function Specification ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ２−２
２−４ Outline type ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ２−３
２−５ Outline ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ２−４
２−６ Each component and function ･････････････････････････････････････････ ２−１２
Chapter ３ Installation
３−１ Check at receipt of our products ････････････････････････････････････ ３−１
３−２ Precautions before installation ( handling ) ･･･････････････････････ ３−３
３−３ Controller installation ･････････････････････････････････････････････ ３−３
３−３−１ Installation conditions ･････････････････････････････････････ ３−３
３−３−２ Installation method ･････････････････････････････････････････ ３−４
３−３−３ Cautions of storage and transportation･･･････････････････････ ３−６
３−４ Installation of regenerative resistor and thermostat ････････････････ ３−７
３−４−１ Regenerative resistor ･･････････････････････････････････････ ３−７
３−４−２ Thermostat ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ３−８
Chapter ４ Wiring
４−１ Wiring precautions ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−１
４−１−１ Noise protection ･･････････････････････････････････････････ ４−１
４−１−２ Control circuit ･････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−１
４−１−３ cable treatment ･････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−２
４−１−４ Installation of surge killer and noise filter ･･･････････････ ４−２
４−２ Power connection ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−３
４−２−１ Input power source ･･････････････････････････････････････････ ４−３
４−２−２ Grounding ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−４
４−２−３ Power supply sequence ･･･････････････････････････････････････ ４−５
４−２−４ Selection of no fuse breaker and earth leakage breaker ･･････ ４−６
４−３ Motor connection ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−６
４−３−１ Motor wiring ････････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−６
４−３−２ Selection of motor rotating direction ･･･････････････････････ ４−８
４−３−３ Cooling blower wiring ･･･････････････････････････････････ ４−９
４−３−４ Electro magnetic brake wiring ･･･････････････････････････ ４−１０
４−４ Applicable cable ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ４−１１
Chapter ５ Signal connection and control / run mode
５−１ External connecting diagram ･････････････････････････････････････････ ５−１
５−２ Input and output signals ････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−５
５−２−１ Input and output signal list ････････････････････････････････ ５−５
５−２−２ Input and output signal function ････････････････････････････ ５−９
５−２−３ Input and output interface･･･････････････････････････････････ ５−２５
５−３ Connector pin location ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−３１
５−３−１ Control I / O connector（ＣＮ１） ･･･････････････････････････ ５−３１
５−３−２ Encoder feedback pulse input connector（ＣＮ２） ･･････ ５−３２
５−３−３ Pulse train communication connector （Ｊ２）･････････････････ ５−３２
５−３−４ Serial communication connector （Ｊ１）･･････････････････････ ５−３３
５−３−５ Analog monitor connector （Ｐ１） ･･････････････････････････ ５−３３
５−３−６ BCD data input connector （Ｊ５） ･･････････････････････････ ５−３４
５−３−７ External power connector （Ｐ２）････････････････････････････ ５−３４
５−３−８ High speed communication connector （ＴＢ２）････････････････ ５−３５
 ５−４ Control mode ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−３６
５−４−１ Control mode selection ･･････････････････････････････････････ ５−３６
５−５ Run mode ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−３７
５−５−１ Manual run mode ･････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−３７
５−５−２ Zero return run mode ････････････････････････････････････････ ５−３９
５−５−３ Auto. run mode ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−４５
５−５−４ Pulse train run mode ････････････････････････････････････････ ５−４７
５−６ Analog monitor ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ５−４８
Chapter６ Run
６−１ Inspection before start ･････････････････････････････････････････････ ６−１
６−２ Run procedure ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ６−１
６−２−１ Confirmation of power source ････････････････････････････････ ６−１
６−２−２ Trial run ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ ６−１
６−３ Adjustment ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ６−３
６−３−１ Adjustment at shipment ･･････････････････････････････････････ ６−３
６−３−２ Adjustment point of individual phenomenon（parameter） ･･････ ６−４
６−３−３ Each adjustment method ･･･････････････････････････････････ ６−５
Chapter ７ Self-diagnosis and forced jog mode
７−１ Self-diagnostic execution procedure ････････････････････････････････ ７−１
７−２ Self-diagnostic items ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ７−２
７−３ Self-diagnostic item description ･･････････････････････････････････ ７−４
７−４ Auto. tuning ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ ７−１０
７−４−１ Auto. tuning execution procedure ････････････････････････････ ７−１１
７−４−２ Auto. tuning function ･･････････････････････････････････････ ７−１２
７−４−３ Tuning level adjustment function ････････････････････････････ ７−１６
７−５ Forced jog mode ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ７−１８
Chapter ８ Maintenance
８−１ Daily inspection ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−１
８−２ Periodic inspection ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−１
８−３ Other inspection ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−２
８−３−１ Gear ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−２
８−３−２ Oil seal ････････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−２
８−３−３ Motor bearing ････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−２
８−３−４ controller ････････････････････････････････････････････････ ８−２
Chapter ９ Error diagnosis and corrective measures
９−１ Inspection and confirmation items ･･････････････････････････････････ ９−１
９−２ Protective function ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ ９−１
９−２−１ Protective function and error treatment ････････････････････ ９−１
９−２−２ Cautions when protective function works ･････････････････････ ９−２
９−２−３ Protective function list ･･･････････････････････････････････ ９−４
９−２−４ Inspection method and measures when protective function works ９−１５
９−３ Trouble shooting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ ９−１９
Chapter １０ Data
１０−１ Electric specification of controller ･･･････････････････････････ １０−１
１０−２ Regenerative resistor outline and combination ･･･････････････････ １０−７
１０−２−１ Regenerative resistor combination ･･･････････････････････１０−７
１０−２−２ Regenerative resistor outline ･･･････････････････････････１０−９
１０−３ Electric specification of motor cooling blower ･････････････････ １０−１０
１０−４ Applicable motor list ･･････････････････････････････････････････ １０−１１
Chapter １ Outline

１−１ Feature
＜ＮＥＸＳＲＴ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ Series＞ is a high performance and multi-function
controller, high speed and very accurate full digital AC servo combined with 1 axis NC
which was developed by our long term experience of servo know-how and sophisticated /
latest technology.

NCS-FI/FS (Hereafter, this unit or controller is used.) is a general name of the following
2 types which function and operation are identical.
NCS-FI type：AC servo controller for induction AC servo motor
NCS-FS type：AC servo controller for synchronous AC servo motor

This unit has several following features suitable for positioning control of various
industrial machines.

【NCS-FI/FS series features】

① By combining 1 axis positioning unit with AC servo driver, less wiring system and
compact size were realized.
② Full digital control achieved less temperature drift, fine adjustment, strengthened
Man-machine interface, and etc., seeking for better reliability and easier operation.
③ The custom made LCD module supports each Monitoring, Alarm history record,
Self-diagnostic function, and etc. . And reliability and maintenance method are improved.
④ Many custom made LSIs and less wiring structure improved reliability and realized
compact size of this unit.
⑤ Adoption of IPM (IGBT) in the power switching section, improved servo performance and
lowered noise.
⑥ Either Positioning run, or Pulse train run mode can be selected for wide range of
application requirements.
⑦ Internal stored data positioning and External trigger positioning can be conducted.
⑧ Position data and speed data can be set by Index data.
⑨ The electronic gear realized Ratio synchronizing control by Pulse train.
⑩ Control such as Linear / S shape curve accel./decel. , Feed-forward, Torque command
filter, gain change at stop status, R2 compensation, Non-coherence, etc. can be
conducted by advanced software servo suitable for machine rigidity.
⑪ By setting a parameter, one unit can be available for various AC servo motor types.
⑫ Through Serial communication, peripherals as host computer, personal computer, PT,
servo display, MDI, and etc. can be interfaced.
⑬ A sequencer (BCD data) can be interfaced. ＊１
⑭ Zero return is not neccessory by using an optional absolute encoder.
⑮ By Pulse train communication, Synchronizing control of max. 10 axes can be conducted.
⑯ 1 controller with sequence control can conduct sequence control of max.16 axes. ＊１
⑰ Either induction servo motor or synchronous servo motor can be controlled by same
operation.

＊１：Some types have the function.

− 1-1 −
１−２ Types
＜ＮＥＸＳＲＴ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ series＞ is divided into 5 types by dedicated functions.
As for details of individual features, peripheral system configuration, functions, and
etc., please refer to the separate instruction manual (Volume: Dedicated function).

Type Name Summary of functions

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ１ Stop point positi- 1 axis positioning or individual independent axis

ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ１ oning control control of plural axis system consisted of several axes.

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ２ Integrated Integrated control of servo driver, NC, and sequencer

ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ２ control for 1 axis or small size machine system.

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ３ Travel positioning Synchronizing of a cutter, press ram, and etc., and
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ３ control machining of a traveling work at specified length can be
conducted.

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ４ Synchronizing Ratio synchronizing control by pulse train

ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ４ control Synchronizing control to a master shaft, a line and etc.
can be widely applied.

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ６ Free curve motion A slave axis is synchronized to a master axis (base
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ６ control axis) and conducts continuous positioning and free curve
motion.
Three dimensional motion of a slave axis can also be
conducted. And also, Cycle run of fixed motion pattern
set by a parameter is possible without specifying base
axis.

［Tab.１−１］ Controller type and name

− 1-2 −
 １−３ System configuration

Peripheral system configuration of NCS-FI/FS unit is as ［Fig.１−１］.

Data input (ＭＤＩ)*1 ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ

Communication cable *1
ＬＣＤ P1 Analog monitor

+Ｖ power
Servo display *1 (DC+12∼24V)
Communication Control input signal
cable *1 J1 Serial Control output signal
Power communication CN1 Pulse train command input
(RS-422A) or measuring encoder
Main controller or personal computer *2 Connectable unit output *3
Communication to J1 is one of
cable *1 MDI, Servo Encoder pulse output
Power display, Master
computer and Pulse train communication
personal computer.

AC200/220V 3 phase power source ＴＢ terminal Ｒ Regenerative

or AC400/440V 3 phase power source block resistor

E Encoder
cable *1
Extended CN2 ﾓｰﾀ
memory

Some types have following functions. Remote sequence

High speed
BCD data input interface Sequence control (SQB ) TB２ communication
Touch panel *1
P2
+Ｖ power CH1 +Ｖ power
(DC+12∼24V) Power OUT (DC+12∼24V)

BCD data input Control output

(SWU-501B 3 units or Main controller or signal
J5 SWU-501C 1 unit can personal computer *2 IN1
be connected.) +Ｖ power
Ｍ complete input (DC+12∼24V)
Power CH2
General output or Control input
M output signal

Software limit output IN2 +Ｖ power

or (DC+12∼24V)
M strobe signal Control input
signal

＊１：This is optional.
＊２：Please use an unit on the general market.
＊３：It can be changed to feedback pulse input from a measuring encoder by setting a parameter.
※ NCS-FI/FS series system configuration is depending on a type.
For more details, please refer to separate instruction manual (Volume Dedicated function).
［Figure １−１］ System configuration

− 1-3 −
Chapter 2 Specification

２−１ Types

ＮＣＳ−Ｆ◇○○□Ａ−×××▽★−×××
Administration No. of special specification
None：No special specification
Series name Specification of individual standard application
None：Standard application
Encoder Specification
Ａ：Increment（ＩＮＣ）
Ｃ：Compact absolute（C-ＡＢＳ）
Output ：×××［Ｗ］
capacity n of 10n
Effective No.
【例】１１３
１０３ ∴ Output capacity＝１１×１０３
１１ ＝１１Ｋ［Ｗ］
Design sequence（A,B,C,...., starts from A.)
Ａ∼Ｚ
Input power type
Ｍ：ＡＣ２００Ｖ system （Ｈ：ＡＣ４００Ｖ system）
Individual dedicated function type (２ digits)
１○：Stop point position control ３○：Running positioning control
２○：Integrated control ４○：Synchronizing control
６○：Free curve run control
○ is ０∼４ number corresponding to individual function.

Control motor type

Ｉ：Induction type AC servo motor
Ｓ：Synchronous type AC servo motor

［Fig.２−１］ Type display

２−２ General Specification

Item Contents
Outline Refer to ｢Controller outline｣.
E Tempera. ０∼５５℃（Unit circumference）/ Stored temp. −２０∼６０℃
n
v Humidity ８５％ or less, non-condensing
i
r Altitude １０００ｍ or less
n
m Location Do not install it in harmful atmosphere, such as corrosive gas, grinding
e. oil, metal powder, oil, etc.
Power NCS-FI**M／NCS-FS**M：3 phase AC180∼242V，50/60Hz
source (NCS-FI**H：3 phase AC360∼484V，50/60Hz)
Cooling method Forced air cooling / Natural air cooling（NCS-FI**M-401/801 only）
Mount.method Panel mounting type（Until NCS-FI/FS**M-401∼113 versions, imbedded
mounting can be optionally applied at our factory.）
Vibration ０．５Ｇ （１０∼５０Ｈｚ）
resistance
Shock resist. ５Ｇ
Noise Line noise ：２０００Ｖ（５０ｎｓ，１μｓ） １ minute
resistance
Radiation noise ：１０００Ｖ（５０ｎｓ／１０ｃｍ） １ minute
Electro-static noise ：１０ｋＶ（between earth and case）
Accessories Regenerative resistor（with thermostat）
※ Controller rating (electric specification) can be referred to
［10-1 Electric specification of controller］
［Tab.２−１］ General specification

− 2-1 −
２−３ Function specification
Item Contents ・ Specification
Number of axes １ axis
Max. speed １Ｍｐｐｓ（4 times of encoder pulse frequency ）
Control factor Position（Position control data / Pulse train ）
Control Position Auto. run（Positioning ）
method control
Pulse train run
Command ① Internal stored data 280 points (Address 0∼255 set by
input Auto. run control signal)
types ② Serial communication
《BCD data input by a digital switch or a sequencer can be
conducted for some types.》
① ９０゜different phase pulse
② Directional pulse
Pulse train ③ Directional signal ＋ feed pulse
command 《Either Line driver method or Open collector method output
can be used. However in the point of noise resistance, Line
driver method is recommended.》
④ Pulse train communication pulse
Major Zero return run, Manual (Jog) run, Pulse train run, Serial communication
function run, Program run（Positioning, Simple continuous positioning, External
trigger positioning,
Four rules of arithmetic / Logic computing, Timer, Un-conditional /
Conditional jump, Sub-routine, Spinner control), Self-diagnosis, Torque
limit, Backlash compensation, Feed-forward ratio set, Electric gear ratio
set, Feedback (encoder pulse) division output, Electric thermal
Accel./Decel. Linear accel./decel., S shape accel./decel
pattern
Input signal ［36 kinds］
Servo ON (SON(*)), Emergency stop (EMG*), Reset (RST), Remote / Local change
(PC), Mode selection (MD1,MD2), Auto. start (PST), Address set (SS1∼PS8),
Forward jog (FJ), Reverse jog (RJ), Hold (HLD), Speed override (OR1∼4),
Deviation clear (CLR), Command pulse input inhibit (CIH(*)), External
trigger (TRG), Zero point decel. (ZLS), Forward over travel (FOT*), Reverse
over travel (ROT*)
＜Below signals can be allocated by Remote control or input signal
allocation and used.＞
M complete (MFIN), Block stop (BSTP), Program cancel (PCAN), Speed gain
selection (GSEL), Forced brake ON (BRON), Torque limit (TL), External
auto. stop inhibit (EPIH), Jog speed change (JOSP)
Output signal ［34 kinds］
Servo ready (RDY), Alarm (ALM(*)), Warning (WNG(*)), In torque limit (LIM),
Speed zero (SZ), Positioning complete (PN)，Brake release (BRK), Rough
matching (PRF)
＜Below signals can be allocated by Remote control or output signal
allocation and used.＞
Program end (PEND), Auto. run ready (PRDY), In Manual run (MMOD), In Auto.
run (AMOD), In Remote mode (RMOD), In Zero return run (HMOD), In Pulse
train run (PMOD), M strobe (MSTB), Software limit switch (SLSA,SLSB),
General output (OUT1∼8), M output (M01∼M80)
Operation / Individual data input and status can be displayed on the front panel LCD
display func. module.
Monitor ① Signal status is displayed on the signal display section of the front
function panel LCD module.
② Individual motion status, setting status (data), and detected abnormal
cause history is displayed on the signal display section of the front panel
LCD module.
③ Analog monitor ： 2 kinds
（2 kinds out of several motion status can be selected and monitored.)
Data memory Next data are retained by non-volatile memory.
function Parameter, Command, Index data（Partial）,
Alarm history (Last 5 cause history is retained.),
（Non-volatile1 memory can be re-written up to 10000 times.）
Protective IPM fault, Over voltage, Under voltage, Over speed, Over load (electric
function thermal), Deviation overflow, Communication error, Data error, CPU fault,
Encoder fault, Absolute encoder fault, etc.
Communication Various data can be transmitted and received by Serial communication
function （RS-422A）.

［Tab.２−２］ Function specification

− 2-2 −
２−４ Outline type
Outline types of NCS-FI/FS are as below.

Outline type Dedicated function type Encoder spec.

（Type○○） （Type▽）

ＴＹＰＥ１ １０、３０、４０，６０ Ａ

ＴＹＰＥ２ １０、３０、４０，６０ Ｃ

ＴＹＰＥ３ １２，１３，３１，３２ ＡｏｒＣ

４１，４２ ６１，６２

ＴＹＰＥ４ ２２，２３，３３，３４ ＡｏｒＣ

４３，４４，６３，６４

［Tab.２−３］ Controller type list

− 2-3 −
２−５ Outline
２−５−１ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊−４０１／８０１

ＴＹＰＥ１：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−４０１Ａ／８０１Ａ (**=10,30,40,60)

ＴＹＰＥ２：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−４０１Ｃ／８０１Ｃ (**=10,30,40,60)

-2- 4 -
ＴＹＰＥ３：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−４０１＊／８０１＊ (**=12,13,31,32,41,42,61,62/*=AorC)

ＴＹＰＥ４：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−４０１＊／８０１＊ (**=22,23,33,34,43,44,63,64/*=AorC)

-2- 5 -
 ２−５−２ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−１２２∼１１３

ＴＹＰＥ１ Controller type W W1 W2 W3 W4

NCS-FI/FS**M-122A/242A/402A 140 130 5 100 15 (**=10,30,40,60)
NCS-FI/FS**M-752A 180 165 7.5 125 20
NCS-FI/FS**M-113A 220 165 30 125 20

ＴＹＰＥ２ Controller type W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6

NCS-FI/FS**M-122C/242C/402C 150 140 10 130 5 100 15 (**=10,30,40,60)
NCS-FI/FS**M-752C 190 180 10 165 7.5 125 20
NCS-FI/FS**M-113C 230 220 10 165 30 125 20

- 2-6 -
ＴＹＰＥ３ Controller type W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6
NCS-FI/FS**M-122*/242*/402* 150 140 10 130 5 100 15 (**=12,13,31,32,41
NCS-FI/FS**M-752* 190 180 10 165 7.5 125 20 42,61,62/*=AorC)
NCS-FI/FS**M-113* 230 220 10 165 30 125 20

ＴＹＰＥ４ Controller type W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6

NCS-FI/FS**M-122*/242*/402* 194 140 54 130 5 100 15 (**=22,23,33,34,43
NCS-FI/FS**M-752* 234 180 54 165 7.5 125 20 44,63,64/*=AorC)
NCS-FI/FS**M-113* 274 220 54 165 30 125 20

- 2-7 -
２−５−３ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−１５３

ＴＹＰＥ１：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１５３Ａ (**=10,30,40,60)
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−１１３Ａ／１５３Ａ）

ＴＹＰＥ２：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１５３Ｃ (**=10,30,40,60)
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−１１３Ｃ／１５３Ｃ）

-2- 8 -
ＴＹＰＥ３：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１５３＊ (**=12,13,31,32,41,42,61,62/AorC)
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−１１３＊／１５３＊）

ＴＹＰＥ４：ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１５３＊ (**=22,23,33,34,43,44,63,64/AorC)
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−１１３＊／１５３＊）

-2- 9 -
２−５−４ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−２２３／３０３／３７３

Ｗ
７．５ Ｗ２ Ｗ１ ６
Ｌ
Ｗ３

MOD
ENT

Ｕｎｉｔ：ｍｍ
Controller type H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 L
NCS-FI/FS**M-223*,303* 580 11 558 20 540 85 300 67.5 165 7 15 270 305
(NCS-FI**H-223*,303*)
NCS-FI**M-373* 700 11 678 20 660 120 450 95 260 9 41 270 330
(NCS-FI**H-373*)

ＴＹＰＥ１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊ ＊＊＝１０，３０，４０，６０／＊＝Ａ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊／３０３＊ ＴＹＰＥ２
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−２２３＊／３０３＊） ＊＊＝１０，３０，４０，６０／＊＝Ｃ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊／３０３＊ ＴＹＰＥ３
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−３７３＊ ＊＊＝１２，１３，３１，３２，４１，４２，
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−３７３＊） ６１，６２／＊＝ＡｏｒＣ

-2- 10 -
 Ｗ
７．５ Ｗ２ Ｗ１ ６
Ｌ１ Ｌ
Ｗ３

MO D
E NT

X 7 X 6 X5 X 4 X 3 X 2 X1 X 0
Y 7 Y 6 Y 5 Y 4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y 0 X S EL Y S EL OP2
３
OP1
RUN
CLR
CH2
CH1

４ ３

Ｗ５
１ Ｗ４

Ｕｎｉｔ：ｍｍ
Controller type H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 L L1
NCS-FI/FS**M-223*,303* 580 11 558 20 540 85 158.6 300 67.5 165 7 15 270 305 46
(NCS-FI**H-223*,303*)
NCS-FI**M-373* 700 11 678 20 660 12 158.6 450 95 260 9 41 270 330 46
(NCS-FI**H-373*)

ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊ ＴＹＰＥ４
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊／３０３＊ ＊＊＝２２，２３，３３，３４，４３，４４
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−２２３＊／３０３＊） ６３，６４／＊＝ＡｏｒＣ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊／３０３＊
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−３７３＊
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−３７３＊）

-2- 11 -
２−６ Each component name and function
Type No. Name Function
Ｒ､Ｓ､Ｔ､Ｅ ● AC input power terminal block
Common
to all Ｕ､Ｖ､Ｗ ● Motor connection terminal block
types
① Ｂ１､Ｂ２ ● Regenerative resistor connection terminal block
（ＤＮ ＊１） （B1-DN is an optional terminal block for power regeneration.）
ｒ､ｓ（＊１） ● Control power connection terminal block
Ｌ１､Ｌ２（＊１） ● Reactor connection terminal block （Reactor is option.）
ＬＣＤ module ● 1 module which combines LCD display and key switches
Common ② Input of data, parameters, and confirmation of each monitor
to all
types ＣＮ１ ● Connector for Control I/O signal and Torque limit command input
● Connector for Encoder feedback pulse input
ＣＮ２ Encoder feedback pulse signal from an encoder on a motor is
inputted.
Ｊ１ ● Connector for Serial communication
By connecting an external unit or an optional unit,
Serial communication is conducted.
● Connector for Analog monitor
Ｐ１ Speed feedback, Torque command, External torque limit,Deviation,
NC speed command, and NC target speed is confirmed as analog
voltage.
③ ● CPU fault display LED
ＨＡＬＴ This is lit when CPU fault as watch dog timer error,etc. .
● Connector for Pulse train communication
Ｊ２ By connecting other NCS-FI/FS to this, Synchronizing control
can be conducted.
● Connector for BCD data input
Ｊ５ BCD data are inputted to this from external unit and Index
＊２ data are set.
Ｐ２ ● Connector for external power connection
● Connector for high speed communication
ＴＢ２ In case of a unit with sequence control and plural axis sequence
＊３ control is required, high speed communication can be conducted.
ＩＤ ● This sets ID No. of high speed communication.。
Jumper switch ● This sets terminal end resistance of high speed communication.
ＣＨ１ ● Serial communication connector Channel 1
ＣＨ２ ● Serial communication connector Channel 2
ＯＵＴ ● Output signal connector
ＩＮ１ ● Input signal connector（X000 ∼ X037）
＊４ ④ ＩＮ２ ● Input signal connector（X040 ∼ X077）
ＸＳＥＬ､ＹＳＥＬ ● I/O signal display selection switch
ＤＳＷ ● Function selection switch
Display ＬＥＤ ● Monitoring LED for Battery fault, Error, Run,
Controller stop, I/O signal, etc.
Note １） ＊１ in type column is for units excluding NCS-FI/FS**M-402 and smaller types.
Note ２） ＊２∼＊４ in type column are for next types.
Dedicated function ＊２ ＊３ ＊４
type
Positioning NCS-FI/FS12 NCS-FI/FS13
Integrated cont. NCS-FI/FS23 NCS-FI/FS22 NCS-FI/FS23
Running NCS-FI/FS31 NCS-FI/FS32 NCS-FI/FS34 NCS-FI/FS33 NCS-FI/FS34
positioning
Synchronization NCS-FI/FS41 NCS-FI/FS42 NCS-FI/FS44 NCS-FI/FS43 NCS-FI/FS44
Free curve NCS-FI/FS61 NCS-FI/FS62 NCS-FI/FS64 NCS-FI/FS63 NCS-FI/FS64

Note 3） ①∼④ in No. column is corresponding to ①∼④ of［２−５ Outline］.

［Tab.２−４］ Controller name list

-2- 12 -
Chapter ３ Installation

３−１ Check at receipt of our products

Please confirm following points when you receive our products.
① If the products are exactly the ones you ordered.（type, rated output, etc.）
② If any damage was made during transportation.（package damage, abnormal outlook of units,
etc.)
③ If accessories are packed together.
If above points are unclear or damage is found, please immediately contact our sales man.
And accessories depends on a controller type as follows.

Controller type Accessories

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−４０１＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−６０−ＦＶ−８０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：０．４ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−８０１＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−６０−ＦＶ−８０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：０．８ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−１２２＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−２００−ＦＶ−４０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：１．５ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−２４２＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−２００−ＦＶ−４０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：２．２ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−４０２＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−４００−ＦＶ−２０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：３．７ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−７５２＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ２００ＧＯＳ４０ΩＪ］ ×３
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：７．５ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−１１３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×３
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：１１ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−１５３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×４
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：１５ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×６
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：２２ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−３０３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×８
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：３０ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ−３７３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×１０
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：３７ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１

［Tab.３−１−１］ Accessory list

− 3-1 −
 Controller type Accessories
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１２２＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−２００−ＦＶ−４０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：１．２ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−２４２＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−２００−ＦＶ−４０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：２．４ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−４０２＊ Cement resistor［ＲＧＨ−４００−ＦＶ−２０］ ×１
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［１ＮＴ０１Ｌ０８５７Ｌ９０−１０］ ×１
Capacity：４．０ｋＷ Thermostat attachment plate ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−７５２＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ２００ＧＯＳ４０ΩＪ］ ×３
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：７．５ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１１３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×３
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：１１ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−１５３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×４
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：１５ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ−２２３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ２４ΩＪ］ ×６
Input voltage：２００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：２２ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１

［Tab.３−１−２］ Accessory list

Controller type Accessories

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−１１３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ１００ΩＪ］ ×３
Input voltage：４００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：１１ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−１５３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ１００ΩＪ］ ×４
Input voltage：４００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：１５ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−２２３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ１００ΩＪ］ ×６
Input voltage：４００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：２２ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−３０３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ１００ΩＪ］ ×８
Input voltage：４００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：３０ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ−３７３＊ Enamel resistor［ＲＧＨ５００ＧＯＳ１００ΩＪ］ ×１０
Input voltage：４００Ｖ Thermostat［５００３−Ｌ−１３０℃Ｂ−１］ ×１
Capacity：３７ｋＷ Thermostat attachment band ×１

［Tab.３−１−３］ Accessory list

Caution
① If packages as cartons, etc. are broken, please do not unpack the packages and
inform our sales man.

− 3-2 −
 ３−２ Precautions before installation (handling)
When you transport a controller or a motor, handle with care so as not to drop and damage th
em.

Caution
① Do not pile controllers but also put anything on the controller.
『Distortion and damage may occur.』
② Be careful not to add shock to a motor shaft.
『An encoder on the motor could be damaged.』
③ Do not move a motor around with having a motor cable.
『The cable could be broken.』

３−３ Controller installation

３−３−１ Ｉｎｓｔａｌｌａｔｉｏｎ ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎｓ
① Ambient condition of a controller can be referred to［２−２ General specification］.
② We recommend to design layout to satisfy the condition that temperature increase in the
control cabinet where this unit is installed, shall be ＋10℃ or less above ambient
temperature.
Consider generation loss of equipment in the control cabinet and a controller, and
influence of convection and radiation in the cabinet, and keep the temperature around
the controller lower than allowable range.
Heat energy of a controller is about 7 % of motor capacity + 50W.
③ When you select a cooling fan or a heat exchanger, calculate generation loss and select
them which can cover the loss.
④ When plural controllers are placed in a control cabinet, consider cooling system,
specially. If layout of controllers and location of cooling fans are not proper, ambient
temperature of the controller may increase and radiation efficiency will be lowered.
Therefore, please pay special attention to this matter. （［Fig.３−１］Reference）

［Fig.３−１］ Fan location to use plural controllers in a cabinet

Caution
① When ambient temperature exceeds allowable range, internal parts of a controller
could be failed or damaged. It could cause abnormal performance of the controller.
Be sure to keep allowable ambient temperature within the specified range.
⑤ If a heating element or vibration source is near a controller, design the layout
to avoid the influence.
⑥ Avoid to install a controller in a place of high temperature, high humidity, large amount
of dust, dirt, metal powder, lamp soot, etc. and corrosive gas.
⑦ If there is a noise source such as electric welders, etc. , near a controller, induction
noise could influence the controller. In the case, ensure that the controller is properly
grounded. And in some cases, a noise filter may be required.
Please refer to［４−１ Wiring precautions］and take proper anti-noise measures.

− 3-3 −
３−３−２ Ｉｎｓｔａｌｌａｔｉｏｎ ｍｅｔｈｏｄ
① Vertical installation is normal. In order to get normal radiation effect, be sure to
install a controller vertically.
② In the points of radiation and maintenance, design to install
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−４０１／８０１／１２２／２４２／４０２／７５２／１１３／１５３
at least 50mm vertically and 20mm horizontally away from other units, parts, and face of
a control cabinet.
［Fig.３−２］Reference
③ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−４０１／８０１／１２２／２４２／４０２／７５２／１１３／１５３
are panel mounting types.
［Fig.３−３］Reference
④ In the points of radiation and maintenance, design to install
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−２２３／３０３／３７３ at least 100mm vertically and 80mm
horizontally away from other units, parts, and face of a control cabinet.
［Fig.３−４］Reference
⑤ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−２２３／３０３／３７３ are panel mounting types
［Fig.３−５］Reference

［Fig.３−２］ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−４０１／８０１／１２２／２４２／４０２／７５２
１１３／１５３ controller installation and ventilation

［Fig.３−３］ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−４０１／８０１／１２２／２４２／４０２
７５２／１１３／１５３ controller installation method

− 3-4 −
［Fig.３−４］ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−２２３／３０３／３７３
controller installation and ventilation

［Fig.３−５］ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊−２２３／３０３／３７３
controller installation method

− 3-5 −
 ３−３−３ Cautions of storage and transportation
① Cautions of storage
If our products are not used immediately after you receive them, store them under the
following conditions in order to prevent deterioration of insulation, rust formation, etc.
.
However, unpack the products soon after you receive them and check damage and other
non-conformance incurred during transportation.

Item Contents

Amb- Temp. −２０℃∼＋６０℃

ient
Humidity ８５％ or less (non-condensing)
con-
dit- Storage Store it in a clean place free from dust and dirt.
ion place Do not store it in harmful atmosphere such as corrosive
gas, grinding liquid, metal powder, oil, etc.

Vibration Store it in a place free from vibration.

Others If storage of a controller is planned for long period,

please make rust prevention to the screws of terminal
blocks and inspect them, periodically.

［Tab.３−２］ Storage conditions of controller

② Precaution of transportation
If you transport our products after you got them, please satisfy next conditions.

Item Contents

Amb- Temp. −２０℃∼＋６０℃

ient
Humidity ８５％ or less (non-condensing)
con-
dit- Trans. Store it in a clean place free from dust and dirt.
ion environ- Do not store it in harmful atmosphere such as corrosive
ment gas, grinding liquid, metal powder, oil, etc.

Vibration ０．５Ｇ or less

［Tab.３−３］ Transportation condition of controller

Caution
① Temperature condition largely influence life time of LCD module in a controller.
We recommend to store and transport the controller in humidity 65 % RH or less.
If humidity is supposed more than 65 ％ RH, please consult our sales man.

− 3-6 −
３−４ Installation of Regenerative resistor, Thermostat
３−４−１ Regenerative resistor
Regenerative resistor assists to exhaust generative energy over-floating the regenerative
condenser capacity, caused by large loading inertia（ＧＤ２ ）during motor braking.
［Fig.３−６］, ［Fig.３−７］Reference
Since Regenerative resistor radiates heat, when you install it, do not leave flammable or
materials weak to heat, nearby.
Regenerative energy is shown as below expression.
ＧＤ２×Ｎ２ Ｅｒ ： Whole regenerative energy ［ｋＷ・ｓ］
Ｅｒ＝ ［ｋＷ・ｓ］ ＧＤ２： Total ＧＤ２ ［ｋｇｆ・ｍ２］
３
７３０×１０ Ｎ ： Motor speed ［ｒｐｍ］
Ｗｒ ： Mean regenerative wattage［ｋＷ］
Ｗｒ＝Ｅｒ／ｔ［ｋＷ］ ｔ ： Time［ｓｅｃ］［Fig.３−７］Ref.

Caution １： If load inertia is large, rotating direction change or start / stop

change is too frequent, the supplied Regenerative resistor capacity may be
insufficient. In the case please consult our sales man when you order our products.
Caution ２： When plural Regenerative resistors are supplied as accessories, connect
them, in parallel. In case of tandem connection, a controller could be damaged.

− 3-7 −
３−４−２ Thermostat
When Regenerative resistor is heated too much, a thermostat is activated and outputs
a contact signal. Contact this contact signal to the power circuit of a controller and
be sure to shut electric power supply OFF when the signal is received.
Thermostat contact capacity is ＡＣ２００Ｖ／１Ａ, normal close contact.

［Thermostat attachment with enamel resistor］

［Thermostat attachment with enamel resistor］

［Fig.３−８］ Thermostat attachment position

Caution
① If abnormal current flows in Regenerative resistor, it becomes hot in very short
time, and a part in a thermostat will be melted. Please be sure to design circuit to
shut electric power supply OFF by the contact signal.

− 3-8 −
Chapter ４ Wiring

４−１ Wiring precautions

４−１−１ Noise protection
External noise may enter via the power supply and signal cables.
Entered external noise may cause mal-function and troubles.
To prevent trouble by noise, it is important to depress noise occurrence and
not to induce occurred noise.
Please completely understand description of ［4-1 Wiring precautions］,［4-2 Power
connection］,［4-3 motor connection］,［4-4 Applicable cable］and conduct wiring.
And since notice《Noise protection》is added to the points to require special
attention, take proper measures in accordance with the suggestion.

４−１−２ Control circuit

１）Pulse rain command, Encoder pulse output
① Be careful not to break cables by strong tension, etc. .
② Pulse train command and Encoder pulse output are high speed pulse train signals.
Please apply twist-pair shield cables and surely connect the shield to FG pin.
《Noise protection》
③ Cable length of Line driver output pulse train command and Encoder pulse output shall
be 3m or less.《Noise protection》
④ Cable length of Open collector pulse train command shall be 1.5m or less.
《Noise protection》

２）Encoder feedback pulse signal

① Encoder feedback signal is high speed pulse train command signal for position and speed
detection. Please use twist-pair shield cable and surely connect the shield to a shield
metal fitting. As for shield treatment of cables, please refer to［4-1-3 Cable treatment］.
《Noise protection》
② If a mobile motor is required, make the cable bending radius as large as possible to
avoid excess stress.
③ Applicable cable types and cable length can be referred to［Tab.４−５］.
④ Dedicated encoder cable sets are optionally available.

３）Control I/O signals（ＰＳＴ，ＳＯＮ(*)，ＲＳＴ, etc. ）

① When relays and switches are used for control input and output signal, please
provide micro-current types.
② Be careful not to break cables by strong tension, etc. .
③ Please apply twist-pair shield cables for control I/O signals and surely
connect the shield to 「CN connector: FG pin｣ and「Other than CN connector : Connector
shield metal fitting.｣ 《Noise protection》
④ Cable length shall be 3m or less.
When a cable longer than 3m is used, relay the signal via a micro-current type relay
to shorten the length between the relay contact and the controller to 3 m or less.
《Noise protection》

Caution
① For control I/O signal wiring, select specified type and diameter cable and comply
with wiring precautions without fail.
Unexpected malfunction could occur and it is very dangerous.
② Be sure to separate control I/O signal cables from the power line (power source,
motor, etc. ) , and never place them in a same duct and bundle.

− 4-1 −
４−１−３ Cable treatment
１） Signal cable arrangement
① Be sure to separate signal cables from the power line (power source line, motor line,
power relay, solenoid, etc. ), and never place them in a same duct and bundle.
② Please separate signal cables and the power line at least 20cm when wiring is conducted.
③ If it is difficult to separate signal cables and the power line, pass signal cables
through a metal tube to shut noise off.

［Fig.４−１］ Cable arrangement using metal tube

２）Shield cable arrangement
① Connect shield armor securely to ｢CN1 connector : FG pin｣, or ｢Other than CN1
connector : Controller shield metal fitting｣ and keep the other end free.
［Fig.４−２＜ａ＞］Reference
② If possible, do not relay shield cable. If un-avoidable, connect shields securely at
the relay terminal point.［Fig.４−２＜ｂ＞］Reference
③ In case of Encoder feedback pulse signal cables, connect both ends to controller side
connector shield metal fitting and encoder side connector shield terminal.
In a very noisy environment, it is more effective to remove the cable cuticle from the
encoder cable at nearest point to the controller and ground the shield armor directly to
a control cabinet. In the case , make electric potential of the wall on which the
controller case is attached equal to that of the ground terminal of the control cabinet.
And please do not place any insulator such as rubber, etc. between the wall and the
controller case.［Fig.４−２＜ｃ＞］Reference

［Fig.４−２］ Shield armor arrangement

４−１−４ Installation of surge killer and noise filter
１）Installation of surge killer
① To depress noise generation, install surge killer (for AC power source) or a diode
(for DC power source) on each relay, magnet contact, solenoid, electro magnetic brake,
etc. used near the controller.［Fig.４−３］Reference

［Fig.４−３］ Anti-noise measures for relay, etc.

− 4-2 −
 ② As ［Fig.４−４］, in case that common power supply is used to a induction motor and a
controller main power, spike noise occurred at forward / reverse rotation change of the
induction motor(IM), may break rectifiers of the controller. Specially, when a large
capacity induction motor is used, insert a spike killer, etc. to main power
(between R-S-T) and depress the spike voltage.

［Fig.４−４］ Common power supply to induction motor

２）Installation of noise filter

① In very noisy power line, for example when noise source such as welders and electric
discharge machines etc. are nearby, install a noise filter or noise cut transformer,
etc. in the main power source of the controller for noise protection of the power line.
When a noise filter is used, be sure to separate input from output cables of the filter,
and never bind them to a same bundle. Also, do not bind the filter ground cable to the
same bundle of filter output cables but ground it in the shortest distance.
② Since switching power supply is used to the controller, switching noise is generated.
If it is supposed that this noise influence other equipment, insert a noise
filter in main power line of the controller and conduct noise measures such as passing
the power and motor lines through a metal tube.

４−２ Power connection

４−２−１ Input power source
① Input power source depends on an applied type as below.
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ／ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊−＊：｢AC180∼242V，50/60Hz 3 phase power source｣
（ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊−＊：｢AC360∼484V，50/60H 3 phase power source｣）
Please keep this range regardless to power source fluctuation due to factory load change.
② Since main power source is a condenser input type, rush current will flow when power is
turned on. depending on power source capacity or impedance, large voltage drop may
occur,therefore, apply sufficiently large capacity of the power source, and cables.
③ Do not mis-connect AC power source (R,S,T,E) to motor connection terminals (U,V,W) of the
controller. If mis-wiring is made, the controller will be damaged.
④ Typical power source circuit is described in［Fig.４−５］.

− 4-3 −
 Caution : Be sure to install a surge killer.
［Fig.４−５］ Typical power source circuit
⑤ In order to protect power source line, and avoid accident as fire, be sure to install
no-fuse breaker.

Caution
① Be sure to keep specified spec. range of the power sour source. If not, the
controller could be damaged.
② In order to protect power source line, and avoid accident as fire, be sure to
install no-fuse breaker.
③ If a magnet contactor is used, be sure to install a surge killer.
④ If possible, separate controller power source from other large power consumption
equipment.

Prohibition
① Do not apply AC 400V to AC 200V input type.
『The controller will be damaged.』
４−２−２ Grounding
① Be sure to conduct grounding to prevent electric shock and noise influence.
② Use a specified area cable for the grounding satisfy JIS Class 3 or better (Grounding
resistance 100 Ω or less). connect ground cable to the terminal (E) of the controller.
③ Dedicated ground is recommended if possible. If shared ground is used, be sure to ground
cables to 1 point.
④ To ground a motor, be sure to connect motor body ground terminal (E) to controller
ground terminal (E).

Caution
① To reduce common mode noise and prevent malfunction of units, use dedicated
ground and satisfy JIS Class 3 or better (Grounding resistance 100 Ω or less).
② When no dedicated grounding can not be made, connect cables only at 1 common
Point ［Fig.４−６］Reference
③ Never use common ground with large power line or connect to iron structure, etc. .

［Fig.４−６］ Grounding method

− 4-4 −
４−２−３ Power supply sequence
① Since main power source circuit is condenser input type, if ON/OFF switching of power is
frequently conducted, main power circuit elements will be deteriorated. Power re-input
shall be conducted 3 minutes or more after the power is turned off.
Control power input timing shall be before or same timing main power is inputted, and
power off timing shall be after main power is off.
However, for integrated power type NCS-FI/FS**M-401∼402, only main power timing is
required.
② ［Fig.４−７］and［Fig.４−８］are timing charts when power is turned on and a problem
occurs.

Control power Main power

max 5sec
Servo ready signal (RDY)
（Brake release signal (BRK)
for with brake type) max 15msec

Servo on signal (SON)

Brake power
(With electro-magnet brake type ）

［Fig.４−７］ Timing chart when power is ON

Alarm signal (ALM)

Time is set by a
parameter.
Servo ready signal (RDY)
（Break line is Brake release ▲ max 1sec
signal (BRK) ） Protective circuit max 0.1sec

Reset signal (RST)

△
Removal of trouble cause

Brake power
(With electro-magnet brake type）

［Fig.４−８］ Timing chart when a trouble occurs.

Caution
① If power is re-inputted within 1 minute after power is off, units may not work.
② If over-current and over-load protection are repeatedly reset in a short period,
a controller temperature will be extremely increased and damaged. Remove the cause,
cool the controller for about 30 minutes and resume it.
③ If more than 10ms black out happens, under voltage protective circuit may be
activated. If it continues, control power is lost and protective circuit is reset.
After then, when the power recovers, again, the situation is same as normal power
input. If automatic motor drive sequence when power is on is planned, change the
sequence to automatically release motor drive when a protective circuit works.

− 4-5 −
 ４−２−４ Selection of no-fuse breaker and earth leakage breaker
In order to prevent units from short-circuit caused by a unit failure, select a suitable
shut down capacity breaker to meet power source capacity.
As for beaker capacity for one unit can be referred to ［１０−１ Electric specification
of controller ］.
When line capacity (power source capacity) is quite large to unit capacity, inset a reactor
and conduct electric coordination.
And in case of using earth leakage breaker, since control inverter section is PWM control,
output contains high harmonic components leakage current is generated by earth electrostatic
capacity of cable route between a controller and a motor and floating capacity between
motor coil and iron core.
Since leakage current of this high harmonic components could activate a earth leakage break
er
select an inverter type (50/60hz) earth leakage breaker for the controller main power circui
t.

Caution
① Since as wiring route is made longer, leakage current increases, make shortest
cables, and place the cables apart from the ground cable and ground as far as
possible (30cm or more).

４−３ Motor connection

４−３−１ Motor wiring
① Connect motor and controller terminals (U,V,W) in the correct phase sequence.
(Connect U-U, V-V, and W-W respectively.)
If phase sequence is wrong, normal control can not be conducted and a motor could vibrate,
start to run without command input or does other action which is very dangerous.
② Motor connection terminals (U,V,W) of synchronous motor types, NA720-122/182/242/402 are
cannon types (male). The wiring side cannon plug shall be provided by customer side or
our optional ones.
The wiring side cannon plug (female) types are shown in the below tabulation and
motor connector No. and connector connection list are in ［Fig.４−９］.
NA720-122/182/242 NA720-402
Motor side cannon plug MS3102A20-18P MS3102A24-11P
Option for Wiring side MS3106B20-18S (straight ) MS3106B24-11S (straight )
cannon Cable clamp MS3057-12A MS3057-16A
NA720-122/182/242 NA720-402 *angle type : option

［Fig.４−９］ Motor cable connector No. location

Pin No. NA720-122/182/242 NA720-402

Ａ (Brake)
Ｂ Ｗ Phase (Brake)
Ｃ
Ｄ Ｕ phase
Ｅ Frame ground (E) Ｖ phase
Ｆ Ｕ phase Ｗ phase
Ｇ (Brake) Frame ground (E)
Ｈ (Brake)
Ｉ Ｖ phase

− 4-6 −
 The specifications of power supply for the brake are listed in the table below.
Please make sure to have a power source that is higher than the required capacity.

Motor type Rated voltage［Ｖ］ Electricity

consumption［Ｗ］
NA720-122/182/242 BAMKS ＤＣ ２４ ２０
NA720-402BAMKS ＤＣ ２４ ３３

③ Do not connect a magnet contactor or a no-fuse breaker between a controller and a motor.
④ When a motor equipped with a brake is used, be sure to release it before starting a motor.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
⑤ Though an electric thermal is installed on a controller, if a thermal relay is added,
externally, set the motor rated current to the relay current value .
By using an auxiliary contact of the thermal relay, make a sequence to turn Servo ON
signal（ＳＯＮ(*)） OFF to stop motor motion.［Fig.４−１０］Reference
⑥ For motor over heat protection, a B contact ( normal close ) type thermostat is
assembled in NA100 series, NA720-372, 552∼233 type motors.
Referring to［Figure４−５］, conduct wiring to shut main power OFF when this relay
is activated. Thermostat contact specification is as follows.

Contact V Contact A (Max./Min.)

ＤＣ ２４Ｖ ２Ａ／０．０５Ａ
ＡＣ２４０Ｖ １Ａ／０．０５Ａ

［Fig.４−１０］ Motor wiring

Caution
① Be sure to connect a motor ground terminal (E) to a controller ground terminal(E).

− 4-7 −
４−３−２ Selection of motor rotating direction
Motor rotating direction is set as below.
① Relation of each command and motor rotating direction in case of connecting standard
motor and encoder, is shown in［Tab.４−１］.
（When the parameter ［P300:Rotating direction selection］ is ‘FORWARD’.）

Command type Command Motor direction

Positioning Forward direction（＋） Forward (CCW)
data command Reverse direction（−） Reverse (CW)
90゜different Ｂ phase ahead pulse Forward (CCW)
phase pulse
train command Ａ phase ahead pulse Reverse (CW)
Directional Pulse input to FC Forward (CCW)
pulse train
command Pulse input to RC Reverse (CW)
Directional RC is OFF / Pulse input to FC Forward (CCW) ※
signal + feed
pulse command RC is ON / Pulse input to FC Reverse (CW) ※
※ ON / OFF of Directional signal is defined that it is ON when current is flowing in
circuits in case of Open collector I/F.（Open collector driver is absorbing current.)
And in case of Line driver I/F, when the driver positive polarity signal (RC) is "H"
and negative polarity signal (RC＊）is "L" , it is defined ON and when opposite status
it is defined OFF.
［Tab.４−１］ Each command input and motor rotating direction

Forward (CCW)： CCW rotation viewed from motor load shaft

Reverse (CW) ： CW rotation viewed from motor load shaft
［Fig.４−１１］ Motor rotating direction
② By setting the parameter［P300: Rotating direction selection］, motor rotating
direction to each command input can be changed as ［Tab.４−２］.
Hereunder in this manual,「Motor forward direction」is defined that a motor runs forward
to a forward command input and 「Motor reverse direction」is defined that a motor runs
reverse to a forward command input.
Command Set of 「Rot. direc.selection」 Moor rotation
ＦＯＲＷＡＲＤ（factory set) Forward (CCW)
Forward
ＲＥＶＥＲＳＥ Reverse (CW)
ＦＯＲＷＡＲＤ（factory set) Reverse (CW)
Reverse
ＲＥＶＥＲＳＥ Forward (CCW)
［Tab,４−２］ Parameter and motor rotating direction

− 4-8 −
４−３−３ Cooling blower wiring
A cooling blower is installed to an un-load shaft side of a motor.
Please attach a thermal relay to a cooling blower. Our relay is available optionally.
Please set rated current value of a cooling blower to the thermal relay.
The rated current value of a cooling blower can be referred to ［10-3 Electric
specification of a cooling blower］.

［Tab.４−１２］Cooling blower wiring

Caution
① Set rated current value of a cooling blower to a thermal relay.
② Since power is not supplied to a cooling blower by a controller, please provide
power source.
③ Be sure not to connect cooling blower terminals to U,V,W of a controller.

− 4-9 −
４−３−４ Electro magnet brake wiring
Some of our motors are equipped with a brake to hold when power is failed, or emergency
case occurs.
① Brakes are de-energized type. They are released when a voltage is supplied, and are
activated when the voltage is cut.
②The brake is activated about 0.5 sec. after voltage is supplied.
③ Optional brake power connection is as ［Tab.４−１３］.
④ The brake terminal has no polarity.
⑤ When the brake terminal P is connected to the output terminal 3, connect the brake
terminal N to the output terminal 4.
⑥ Do not short-circuit the output terminal 3 and 4.
⑦ Capacity of a contact between the output terminal 5 and 6 is recommended 5 to 6 times
of whole applied brake capacity.

［Fig.４−１３］ Brake power connection

When you provide the brake power, please refer to ［Fig.４−１４］.

［Fig.４−１４］ Brake power circuit

Caution
① Sine an electro-magnetic brake is released about 0.5 sec. after voltage is supplied
consider it and set timing to motor motion commands. Be sure to turn OFF motor
motion command before activating the electro-magnetic brake.
② Since the electro-magnetic brake is holding purpose only, never activate the brake
during a motor is running.

Motor motion command ON

OFF
Brake power ON(open)
OFF(hold)
0sec or more 0.5sec or more

［Fig.４−１５］ Brake power and motion command timing

− 4-10 −
４−４ Applicable cable

Please use cables described in ［Tab.４−４］and［Tab.４−５］.

※ Please use our optional cable for control circuits.

Caution
① Cable type and size can be changed depending on actual conditions and environment.
Please consult our sales man for further information.
② If control signal cable is longer, the unit likely to be influenced, keep the
specified length. And be sure to use specified cable type.

Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FI**Ｍ*-401 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-801 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-122

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 2 or more 2 or more 2 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 1.25 or more 2 or more 2 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ
c
i Cooling blower motor
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 1.25 or more 2 or more 2 or more

［Tab.４−４−１］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Unit:mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FI**Ｍ*-242 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-402 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-752

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 2 or more 3.5 or more 8 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 2 or more 3.5 or more 8 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 2 or more 3.5 or more 3.5 or more

［Tab.４−４−２ ］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FI**Ｍ*-113 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-153 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-223

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 14 or more 22 or more 38 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 14 or more 22 or more 38 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 5.5 or more 8 or more 0.75 or more
［Tab.４−４−３］ Applicable cable for main circuit

− 4-11 −
 Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FI**Ｍ*-303 NCS-FI**Ｍ*-373

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 50 or more 60 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 50 or more 60 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor 1.25 or more 1.25 or more
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 14 or more 22 or more

［Tab.４−４−４］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FS**Ｍ*-122 NCS-FS**Ｍ*-242 NCS-FS**Ｍ*-402

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 2 or more 2 or more 3.5 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 2 or more 2 or more 3.5 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ
c
i Cooling blower motor
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 2 or more 2 or more 3.5 or more

［Tab.４−４−５］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FS**Ｍ*-752 NCS-FS**Ｍ*-113 NCS-FS**Ｍ*-153

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 8 or more 14 or more 22 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 14 or more 14 or more 22 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 3.5 or more 8 or more 8 or more

［Tab.４−４−６］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FS**Ｍ*-223

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 30 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 30 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 14 or more

［Tab.４−４−７］ Applicable cable for main circuit

− 4-12 −
 Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FI**Ｈ*-113 NCS-FI**Ｈ*-153 NCS-FI**Ｈ*-223

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 5.5 or more 5.5 or more 14 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 8 or more 8 or more 22 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor 0.75 or more 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 3.5 or more 3.5 or more 5.5 or more

［Tab.４−４−８ ］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Unit: mm２

Item Terminal NCS-FI**Ｈ*-303 NCS-FI**Ｈ*-373

M AC in. power, ground Ｒ，Ｓ，Ｔ，Ｅ 14 or more 22 or more
a
i Motor Ｕ，Ｖ，Ｗ，Ｅ 22 or more 30 or more
n
Control AC in. power ｒ，ｔ 0.75 or more 0.75 or more
c
i Cooling blower motor 1.25 or more 1.25 or more
r
c. Regenerative resistor Ｂ１，Ｂ２ 8 or more 8 or more

［Tab.４−４−９ ］ Applicable cable for main circuit

Item Terminal NCS-FI/FS**Ｍ*-*／(NCS-FI**Ｈ*-*)

C Anal. V command inp. INH,TQH
o (Speed, torque) TL+,TL-,GND AWG28 or more twist-pair shield cable : 3m or less
n Anal. monitor output INH0,MON1,2
t
r Pulse train command FC/FC*,RC/RC* AWG28 or more twist-pair shield cable
o input FC/GND Line driver output : 3m or less
l RC/GND Open collector output : 1.5m or less
c Encoder pulse EA/EA*,EB/EB*, AWG28 or more twist-pair shield cable :
i output EM/EM*,GND Length: 3m or less (GND :0.5mm２ or more)
r
c
u Encoder feedback A/A*,B/B*, 0.2mm２ or more twist-pair shield cable
i pulse input Z/Z* EP5,GND :0.5mm２ or more
t (EP5,GND) Length : 50m or less
Other control AWG28 or more shield cable
input / output Length : 3m or less (+24V,COM :0.5mm２ or more)

［Tab.４−５］ Applicable cable for main circuit

− 4-13 −
Chaper 5 Signal connection and control mode

５−１ External connecting diagram

［Fig.５−１ (a)］ External connecting diagram 1/4

− 5-1 −
［Fig.５−１ (b)］ External connecting diagram 2/4

− 5-2 −
［Fig.５−１ (c)］ External connecting diagram 3/4

− 5-3 −
［Fig.５−１ (d)］ External connecting diagram 4/4

− 5-4 −
５−２ Input and output signals

５−２−１ Input and output signal list

Individual signal function is changed by Run mode. Page in the column of function page
explains the signal function for each mode.

Signal Signal Inp. I/O terminal

type Remote
Func- Name Code Con. Circu- control
tion Out. No. it No.
page
Control mode 5-9 Remote / Local change ＰＣ Inp. CN1 Ｉ−１ −−−−
signals
In Remote control mode ＲＭＯＤ Out. −−−−−− Yes
Common 5-10 Emergency stop ＥＭＧ＊ Inp. CN1 Ｉ−１ Yes
signals to Forward over-travel ＦＯＴ＊
all Run modes Reverse over-travel ＲＯＴ＊
Mode selection 1, 2 ＭＤ１，ＭＤ２
Servo ON ＳＯＮ（＊）
5-11 Reset ＲＳＴ
Deviation clear ＣＬＲ
Speed gain selection ＧＳＥＬ −−−−−− Yes
Forced brake ON ＢＲＯＮ
Torque limit ＴＬ
Torque limit command TL+,TL- CN1 Ｉ−７ −−−−
5-12 Servo ready ＲＤＹ Out. CN1 Ｏ−１ Yes
Alarm ＡＬＭ（＊）
Warning ＷＮＧ（＊） Ｏ−２
Speed zero ＳＺ
In Torque limit ＬＩＭ
Brake release ＢＲＫ
5-13 Soft.limit switch A, B S L S A，S L S B Ｊ５ Ｏ−６
5-23 Pulse train command FC､FC*､RC､RC* Inp. CN1 Ｉ−３ −−−−
5-13 Encoder feedback A､A*､B､B*､Z､Z* CN2 Ｉ−４
pulse input SD､SD*
Thermistor input ＴＨＭ Ｉ−８
5-14 Encoder pulse output EA,EA*,EB,EB* Out. CN1 Ｏ−４
EM,EM*,AD,AD*
Encoder marker ＯＣＭ Ｏ−３
Analog monitor M O N 1，M O N 2 Ｐ１ Ｏ−５
IＮＨ０
Serial communication TXD(A)､TXD(B) Inp. Ｊ１ IO−１
RXD(A)､RXD(B) Out.
RLR(A)
Manual run 5-15 Forward jog ＦＪ Inp. CN1 Ｉ−１ Yes
mode signals
Reverse jog ＲＪ
Speed override 1∼4 ＯＲ１∼ＯＲ４
Command pulse input ＣＩＨ（＊）
inhibit
Jog speed change ＪＯＳＰ −−−−−−
5-１6
In Manual run mode ＭＭＯＤ Out. −−−−−−
［Tab.５−１ (a)］ Input / Output signal list 1/2

− 5-5 −
 Signal Signal Inp. I/O terminal
type Remote
Func- Name Code Con. Circu- control
tion Out. No. it No.
page
Zero return 5-17 Forward jog ＦＪ Inp. CN1 Ｉ−１ Yes
run mode
signals Reverse jog ＲＪ
Hold ＨＬＤ
Speed override 1∼4※2 ＯＲ１∼ＯＲ４
5-15 Ｉ−１ Yes
Cmmd pls in.inhibit※2 ＣＩＨ（＊）
5-17 Zero return decel. ＺＬＳ Ｉ−２ −−−−
Positioning complete ＰＮ Out. Ｏ−２ Yes
Rough matching ＰＲＦ
In Zero return run ＨＭＯＤ −−−−−−
Auto. run 5-18 Auto. start ＰＳＴ Inp. CN1 Ｉ−１ Yes
mode signals
Address set 1∼8 ＳＳ１∼ＰＳ８
5-19 Hold ＨＬＤ
5-15 Speed override 1∼4※2 ＯＲ１∼ＯＲ４
Cmmd pls in.inhibit※2 ＣＩＨ（＊）
5-17 Zero point decel. ※3 ＺＬＳ Ｉ−２ −−−−
5-19 External trigger ＴＲＧ
M complete ＭＦＩＮ Ｊ５ Ｉ−５ Yes
Ext.auto start inhibit ＥＰＩＨ −−−−−−
Block stop ＢＳＴＰ
Program cancel ＰＣＡＮ
5-20 ＢＣＤ data input D11∼D88､D- Ｊ５ Ｉ−５ −−−−
Positioning complete ＰＮ Out. CN1 Ｏ−２ Yes
Rough matching ＰＲＦ
Auto. run ready ＰＲＤＹ −−−−−−
Program end ＰＥＮＤ
5-21 In Auto. run ＡＭＯＤ
General output 1∼8 O U T 1∼O U T 8 Ｊ５ Ｏ−６
Ｍ output 01∼80 Ｍ０１∼Ｍ８０
Ｍ strobe ＭＳＴＢ
5-22 Dig. switch cmmn out. ＣＭ２∼ＣＭ７ −−−−
Speed command ＩＮＨ Inp. CN1 Ｉ−８ −−−−
Torque command ＴＱＨ Ｉ−９
Pulse train 5-23 Cmmd pls input inhibit ＣＩＨ（＊） Inp. CN1 Ｉ−２ Yes
run signals
Pulse train DT,DT*､CK､CK* Inp. J2 IO−２ −−−−
communication Out.
5-24 Positioning complete ＰＮ Out. CN1 Ｏ−２ Yes
In Pulse train run ＰＭＯＤ −−−−−−
※１ The column of signal function indicates page where individual signal function is described.
※２ Speed override signal and command pulse input inhibit functions are common to Manual run
mode, Zero return run mode, and Auto. run mode.
※３ Zero return decel. signal function is common to Zero return run mode, and Auto. run mode.
※４ Signals with“＊”in the signal code column are negative-true logic signals, signals with
“（＊）”can be changed those logic by parameters, and signals without “＊”are
positive-true logic signals.
Relation of individual signal terminal status and logic is described in ［５−２−３
Input / Output interface］
※５ I/O terminal and circuit No. columns show Input / Output interface circuit No. of
individual signal. Please refer to ［５−２−３ Input / Output interface］.
※６ In Remote control column, Yes or No of Remote control by individual signal is shown.
Device No. of a signal which can be available for Remote control can be referred to
［Tab.５−２ Remote control available signal list］. And regardless to positive-true or
negative-true logic, Remote control signal is "ON" to data "1" and "OFF" to data "0".
［Tab.５−１ (b)］ Input / Output signal list 2/2

− 5-6 −
 Inp. Device No.
Signal name Code
Out. Serial Sequence Remote sequen-
communi. control ce control
Reset ＲＳＴ Inp. X0000 M9144 Ymn00
Emergency stop EMG* X0001 M9145 Ymn01
Servo ON SON(*) X0002 M9146 Ymn02
Auto. start ＰＳＴ X0003 M9147 Ymn03
Hold ＨＬＤ X0004 M9148 Ymn04
Deviation clear ＣＬＲ X0005 M9149 Ymn05
Forward O.T FOT* X0006 M9150 Ymn06
Reverse O.T ROT* X0007 M9151 Ymn07
Address set 1 ＳＳ１ X0008 M9152 Ymn10
Address set 2 ＳＳ２ X0009 M9153 Ymn11
Address set 3 ＳＳ３ X000A M9154 Ymn12
Address set 4 ＰＳ４ X000B M9155 Ymn13
Address set 5 ＰＳ５ X000C M9156 Ymn14
Address set 6 ＰＳ６ X000D M9157 Ymn15
Address set 7 ＰＳ７ X000E M9158 Ymn16
Address set 8 ＰＳ８ X000F M9159 Ymn17
Forward jog Ｆ Ｊ X0018 M9168 Ymn30
Reverse jog Ｒ Ｊ X0019 M9169 Ymn31
Speed override 1 ＯＲ１ X001C M9172 Ymn34
Speed override 2 ＯＲ２ X001D M9173 Ymn35
Speed override 3 ＯＲ３ X001E M9174 Ymn36
Speed override 4 ＯＲ４ X001F M9175 Ymn37
Mode select. 1 ＭＤ１ X0020 M9176 Ymn40
Mode select. 2 ＭＤ２ X0021 M9177 Ymn41
Jog speed selec. JOSP X0022 M9178 Ymn42
Torque limit Ｔ Ｌ X0023 M9179 Ymn43
Cmmd pls input CIH(*) X0024 M9180 Ymn44
inhibit
Ｍ complete MFIN X0031 M9193 Ymn61
Block stop BSTP X0033 M9195 Ymn63
Block cancel PCAN X0034 M9196 Ymn64
Auto. start inh. EPIH X0035 M9197 Ymn65
Forced brake ON BRON X0036 M9198 Ymn66
Spd gain select. GSＥＬ X0037 M9199 Ymn67
※1 Device No. column shows a device number of Remote control data area corresponding to
individual signal.
※2 And regardless to positive-true or negative-true logic, Remote control signal is "ON" to
data "1" and "OFF" to data "0".
※3 Mn of Ｙｍｎ device is 2 digit numeral displayed by octal number for connection node ID No.

［Tab.５−２(ａ)］ Remote control available signal list 1/2

− 5-7 −
 Inp. Device No.
Signal name Code
Out. Serial Sequence Remote sequen-
communi. control ce control
Alarm ALM(*) Out. X0060 M9208 Xmn00
Warning WNG(*) X0061 M9209 Xmn01
Servo ready ＲＤＹ X0062 M9210 Xmn02
Speed zero ＳＺ X0063 M9211 Xmn03
Position. complete ＰＮ X0064 M9212 Xmn04
Rough matching ＰＲＦ X0065 M9213 Xmn05
Brake release ＢＲＫ X0066 M9214 Xmn06
In Torque limit ＬＩＭ X0067 M9215 Xmn07
Program end PEND X0068 M9216 Xmn10
Auto. run ready PRDY X0069 M9217 Xmn11
In Manual run MMOD X006A M9218 Xmn12
In Zero return run HMOD X006B M9219 Xmn13
In Auto. run AMOD X006C M9220 Xmn14
In Pulse train run PMOD X006D M9221 Xmn15
In Remote control RMOD X006E M9222 Xmn16
General output 1 OUT1 X0070 M9224 Xmn20
General output 2 OUT2 X0071 M9225 Xmn21
General output 3 OUT3 X0072 M9226 Xmn22
General output 4 OUT4 X0073 M9227 Xmn23
General output 5 OUT5 X0074 M9228 Xmn24
General output 6 OUT6 X0075 M9229 Xmn25
General output 7 OUT7 X0076 M9230 Xmn26
General output 8 OUT8 X0077 M9231 Xmn27
Soft.lim. switch A SLSA X007E M9238 Xmn36
Soft.lim. switch B SLSB X007F M9239 Xmn37
M output 01 Ｍ０１ X0080 M9240 Xmn40
M output 02 Ｍ０２ X0081 M9241 Xmn41
M output 04 Ｍ０４ X0082 M9242 Xmn42
M output 08 Ｍ０８ X0083 M9243 Xmn43
M output 10 Ｍ１０ X0084 M9244 Xmn44
M output 20 Ｍ２０ X0085 M9245 Xmn45
M output 40 Ｍ４０ X0086 M9246 Xmn46
M output 80 Ｍ８０ X0087 M9247 Xmn47
M strobe MSTB X008E M9254 Xmn56
※1 Device No. column shows a device number of Remote control data area corresponding to
individual signal.
※2 And regardless to positive-true or negative-true logic, Remote control signal is "ON" to
data "1" and "OFF" to data "0".
※3 Mn of Ｘｍｎ device is 2 digit numeral displayed by octal number for connection node ID No.

［Tab.５−２(b)］ Remote control available signal list 2/2

− 5-8 −
５−２−２ Input and output signal functions
Description of input and output signal functions in this item is effective only when they
are not described in the separate instruction manual ＜Volume Dedicated functions＞.
If input and output signal functions are described in the manual ＜Volume Dedicated functions,
they are prior to the same item description in this manual.

Input and output signal functions are described in［Tab.５−１ Input and output signal list］.
Please find page No. in the function column of list and refer to the page.
Next to signal codes, Input and output terminal No. / Serial communication device No. /
Sequence control device No. / Remote sequence control device No. are shown in ［ ］s.

Control mode signals

Remote / Local change ＰＣ[CN1-7pin/--/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・Control mode is Remote mode when it is ON.
u ・Control mode is Local mode when it is OFF.
n ・［ＰＣ］of LCD module is lit ON when it is ON.
c.
Ref.・In Local mode, External input disable / Remote input enable is set by the parameter
｢P516｣.
・In Remote mode, External input enable is set by the parameter ｢P517｣.
In Remote control ＲＭＯＤ[--/X006E/M9222/Xmn16] Out. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When it is ON, it indicates current mode is Remote mode.
u ・When it is OFF, it indicates current mode is Local mode.
n
c.
Ref.・In executing Auto. pre-load with compact absolute specification, this signal is OFF.
・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external input signal by the parameters ｢P737-P739｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of『Diagnosis
display mode』 becomes "1".

− 5-9 −
Common signal to all mode
Emergency stop ＥＭＧ＊[CN1-37pin/X0001/M9145/Ymn01] Inp. Circuit No: I-1
F ・A motor does not run in Emergency stop status.
u ・If ON status of this signal continues for more than 10 [ｍｓ] during a motor is
n running, a motor stops in accordance with the method and decel. time specified by
c. parameters［P710］［P711］. After the motor stops and time set by the parameter［P712］
passes, the motor becomes in Torque free status and Servo ready signal (RDY) is OFF.
・When Emergency stop is ON,［ＥＭＧ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・To release Emergency stop status, turn Emergency stop signal OFF, and input Reset
signal (RST).
・Connect normal close contact to this signal.
Forward over travel ＦＯＴ＊[CN1-2pin/X0006/M9150/Ymn06] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・If this signal is ON when a motor is running forward, this unit judges that the motor
u reached forward travel limit point, the motor stops suddenly and becomes in Servo lock.
n However, reverse motion can be conducted in Manual run.
c. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＦＯＴ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・Enable / Disable can be selected by the parameter［P705］.
・Connect normal close contact to this signal.
Reverse over travel ＲＯＴ＊[CN1-4pin/X0007/M9151/Ymn07] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・If this signal is ON when a motor is running reverse, this unit judges that the motor
u reached reverse travel limit point, the motor stops suddenly and becomes in Servo lock.
n However, forward motion can be conducted in Manual run.
c. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＲＯＴ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・Enable / Disable can be selected by the parameter［P705］.
・Connect normal close contact to this signal.
Mode ＭＤ１[CN1-11pin/X0020/M9176/Ymn40] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
selection ＭＤ２[CN1-9pin/X0021/M9177/Ymn41]

F ・Run mode is selected by the combination of MD1 and MD2 MD2 MD1 Run mode
u signals.
n ・Run mode is selected by this signal status as the right OFF OFF Manual run
c. tabulation.
・The shift time to a new mode after signals are switched can OFF ON Zero return
be set by the parameter ［P706］. run
・When these signal are ON, ［ＭＤ２］and ［ＭＤ１］of LCD
module are lit, respectively. ON OFF Auto. run

ON ON Pulse train
run
Servo ON ＳＯＮ（＊）[CN1-35pin/X0002/M9146/Ymn02] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・When this signal is ON, power transistors are driven and power is supplied to a
u motor.
n ・When this signal is OFF, power transistors are not driven and a motor
c. becomes in Torque free.
・When this signal is OFF in motor running, the motor conducts free run stop.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＳＯＮ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This signal logic can be changed by the parameter［P704］(Initial set:Positive-true).

− 5-10 −
Reset ＲＳＴ[CN1-1pin/X0000/M9144/Ymn00] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・When this signal is ON in detecting Alarm, the detecting alarm is released and
u Alarm signal (ALM) is turned O F F .
n ・During this signal is ON, a motor is in Torque free.
c. ・When ON status is changed to OFF, this unit returns to normal control condition.
・This signal can be also used as a release signal of Emergency stop.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＲＳＴ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・Alarm reset can be conducted also by re-inputting power to this unit.
・Alarm reset shall be made after removing the cause.
・This signal can be changed to CPU reset by the parameter (P742).
・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
Deviation ＣＬＲ[CN1-15pin/X0005/M9149/Ymn05] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
clear
F ・When this signal is ON, position deviation counter is cleared and a motor stops with
u zero speed command status.
n ・When this is ON in motor running, the motor stops suddenly.
c. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＣＬＲ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
Forced brake ON ＢＲＯＮ[--/X0036/M9198/Ymn66] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When this signal is ON, Brake release signal (BRK) is forcibly changed to brake
u. status.
Ref.・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".
Spd.gain selec. ＧＳＥＬ[--/X0037/M9199/Ymn67] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When this signal is ON, this unit is controlled with Speed gain set by P116∼P119.
n. ・When this signal is OFF, this unit is controlled with Speed gain set by P01∼P104 or
P105∼P108.
Ref.・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".
・Since explanation in this manual is written as this signal is OFF status, unless
｢When GSEL signal is ON.｣ is described, please remember this signal is OFF status.
Torque limit ＴＬ[--/X0023/M9179/Ymn43] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When this signal is, motor output torque is controlled by parameters (P111,P112).
u However when output torque set by parameters (P111,P112) is larger than the torque set
n. by parameters (P109,P110), the latter value is selected.
Ref.・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".
Torque limit ＴＬ−[CN1-29pin/--/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-6
command ＴＬ＋[CN1-30pin/--/--/--] Analog signal
F ・「−１」is set to parameters［P111/112: Torque limit value 2±］ and when Torque
u limit signal (TL) is ON, motor output torque is limited by this signal voltage.
n ・「−１」is set to parameters［P111/112: Torque limit value 2±］and ｢ALM.TL.Y｣」is
c set to［P115: Torque limit selection at Alarm stop ］. And when Alarm occurs、motor
t output torque is limited by this signal voltage.
i ・However when output torque set by parameters (P111,P112) is larger than the
o torque set by parameters (P109,P110), the latter value is selected.
n ・Forward drive torque is limited by TL + command.
・Reverse drive torque is limited by TL - command.
・Based on GND terminals（CN1-27pin）voltage, both of TL+ and TL-ＴＬ＋ are inputted
positive voltage.
Input range is DC0∼＋10V, and each limit value is 300% at ＋10V input.

− 5-11 −
Servo ready ＲＤＹ[CN1-42pin/X0062/M9210/Xmn02] Out. Circuit No.：O−1
F ・When this unit ready to control, this signal is ON.
u ・When a motor is in Torque free this signal is OFF.
n ・When this signal is ON, ［ＲＤＹ］of LCD module is lit.
c.
Ref.・This signal can be outputted max. 5 second after re-inputting power.
And this signal is ON max. 15 [ｍｓ]after Servo ON signal (SON(*)) is ON, and
max. 20 [ｍｓ] after Reset signal (RST) is OFF. Please consider this timing to
power re-input and trouble shooting sequence of an external equipment.
・Output condition when Alarm occurs can be changed by the parameter［P716］.
Alarm ＡＬＭ（＊）[CN1-44pin/X0060/M9208/Xmn00] Out. Circuit No.：O−1
F ・When Alarm occurs, this signal is ON.
u ・When this signal is ON, ［ＡＬＭ］of LCD module is lit.
n
c.
Ref.・This signal logic can be changed by the parameter［P715］(Initial set:Negative-true).
・Alarm reset is conducted by Reset signal (RST) input or power re-input and is OFF
max. 20 [ｍｓ] after Reset signal is ON.
Warning ＷＮＧ（＊）[CN1-46pin/X0061/M9209/Xmn01] Out. Circuit No.：O−2
F ・If it is supposed to detect an error and stop when current control is continued, this
u signal is ON as Warning signal. Even though this signal is ON, running status does not
n change.
c. ・When it is confirmed that an abnormal error will not occur, this signal is OFF.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＷＮＧ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This signal logic can be changed by the parameter［P715］(Initial set:Positive-true).
・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P7401｣.
Spd zero ＳＺ[CN1-50pin/X0063/M9211/Xmn03] Out. Circuit No.：O−2
F ・When motor speed is lower than the set of the parameter［P702］, this signal is ON.
u ・When motor speed is more than the set of the parameter［P702］, this signal is OFF.
n. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＳＺ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P740｣.
In Trq. limit ＬＩＭ[CN1-48pin/X0067/M9215/Xmn07] Out. Circuit No.：O−2
F ・When torque is in limit area, this signal is ON.
u ・When torque is out of limit area, this signal is OFF.
n ・Torque limit area is determined by parameters［P109］∼［P112］and Torque limit
c. command (TL±).
・When this signal is ON, ［ＬＩＭ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P741｣.
Brake relea. ＢＲＫ[CN1-54/X0066/M9214/Xmn06] Out. Circuit No.：O−2
F ・Design an external sequence to release a motor brake when this signal is ON.
u ・When Alarm, Emergency stop, or Servo OFF occurs and Reset signal is inputted in motor
n torque free status, this signal is OFF .
c. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＢＲＫ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P741｣.

− 5-12 −
Software limit ＳＬＳＡ[J5-A28pin/X007E/M9238/Xmn36] Out. Circuit No.：O−6
switch A,B ＳＬＳＢ[J5-B28pin/X007F/M9239/Xmn37]
F ・In accordance with the area set by SLSB SLSA Output condition
u parameters［P707］∼［P709］, signals
n corresponding to the current position OFF OFF Before Zero return complete
c area are outputted.
t OFF OFF Current position ＜[P707] setting
i ・Output status of parameters and
o signals is shown in right tabulation. OFF ＯＮ [P707]setting≦Current position＜
n ・Since Software limit switch output [P708] setting
is controlled by current command
position, its output differs from ＯＮ ＯＮ [P708]setting≦Current position＜
its actual position. The error is [P709]setting
position deviation amount.
・When machine position is not ＯＮ OFF [P709]setting≦Current position
recognized by Zero return not
complete, etc. , this signal is OFF.
Ref.・This signal output terminal is common to M strobe signal (MSTB) output terminal.
・An output signal is selected by the parameter［P718］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』becomes "1".
Encoder Ａ[CN2-7pin/--/--/--], Ａ＊[CN2-8pin/--/--/--], Inp. Circuit.No.：I-4
feedback Ｂ[CN2-9pin/--/--/--], Ｂ＊[CN2-10pin/--/--/--],
pulse Ｚ[CN2-11pin/--/--/--],Ｚ＊[CN2-12pin/--/--/--],
input ＳＤ[CN2-5pin/--/--/--],ＳＤ＊[CN2-6pin/--/--/--]
F ・Feedback pulse signal from an encoder attached to a motor is inputted.
u ・A , B and, Z phases of Line driver output［26LS31 or equivalent］are inputted.
n ・SD and SD＊ are absolute encoder position data.
c.
Thermistor input ＴＨＭ[CN2-17pin/--/--/--] Inp. Circuit.No.：I-7
F ・Temperature of a thermistor attached to a motor is inputted.
u
n
c.

− 5-13 −
Encoder ＥＡ[CN1-17pin/--/--/--]，ＥＡ＊[CN1-19pin/--/--/--] Out. Circuit No.: O-4
pulse ＥＢ[CN1-21pin/--/--/--]，ＥＢ＊[CN1-23pin/--/--/--]
output ＥＭ[CN1-22pin/--/--/--]，ＥＭ＊[CN1-24pin/--/--/--]
ＡＤ[CN1-25pin/--/--/--]，ＡＤ＊[CN1-26pin/--/--/--]
F ・Encoder feedback pulse input (CN2) is divided to 1/N (N=1∼32) by the parameter
u ［P004］set and outputted.
n ・Outputs are 90ﾟ different phase signals of Line driver output［26LS31 or
c. equivalent］. Be sure to interface them with Line receiver［26LS32 or equivalent］.
Ref.・This signal (EA,EA*,EB,EB*,EM,EM*,AD,AD*）is unstable for max. 2 seconds after power
is re-inputted.
Encoder marker ＯＣＭ[CN1-58pin/--/--/--] Out. Circuit No.: O-3
F ・When Encoder feedback marker signals（Z,Z＊）are ON, this signal is ON.
u.
Analog monitor ＭＯＮ１[P1-2pin/--/--/--]， Out. Circuit No.: O-5
ＭＯＮ２[P1-1pin/--/--/--]
ＩＮＨ０[P1-3pin/--/--/--]
F ・They are analog monitor outputs to confirm the controller and motor running status.
u ・Monitor output contents of MON1 signal are set by the parameter［P700］.
n ・Monitor output contents of MON2 signal are set by the parameter［P701］
c. ・INHO signal outputs Speed command voltage (INH).
Serial ＴＸＤ(A)[J1-1pin,2pin/--/--/--]， Inp. Circuit No.: IO-1
communica- ＴＸＤ(B)[J1-8pin,9pin/--/--/--]， Out.
tion ＲＸＤ(A)[J1-4pin,5pin/--/--/--]，
ＲＸＤ(B)[J1-11pin,12pin/--/--/--]，
ＲＬＲ(A)[J1-3pin/--/--/--]
ＲＬＴ(B)[J1-10pin/--/--/--]
F ・By connecting an external equipment to this unit, Serial communication (RS-422) can
u be conducted.
n. ・Communication condition as baud rate and others can be set by parameters［P510］∼
［P515］）.

− 5-14 −
Manual run mode signals
Forward jog ＦＪ[CN1-3pin/X0018/M9168/Ymn30] Inp. Circuit No: I-1
F ・When ON status is continued for more than 10［ｍｓ］, one shot Jog (minimum travel
u amount setting unit) motion is conducted to forward direction. When ON status is
n continued for more than 100［ｍｓ］, Forward jog motion is conducted.
c. ・When this signal is OFF, Forward jog motion is stopped.
And if Reverse jog signal (RJ) is ON when this signal is ON, Forward jog motion is
stopped.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＤＲ／ＦＪ］of LCD module is lit.
Reverse jog ＲＪ[CN1-5pin/X0019/M9169/Ymn31] Inp. Circuit No: I-1
F ・When ON status is continued for more than 10［ｍｓ］, one shot Jog (minimum travel
u amount setting unit) motion is conducted to reverse direction. When ON status is
n continued for more than 100［ｍｓ］, Reverse jog motion is conducted.
c. ・When this signal is OFF, Reverse jog motion is stopped.
And if Forward jog signal (FJ) is ON when this signal is ON, Reverse jog motion is
stopped.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＴＬ／ＲＪ］of LCD module is lit.
Jog spd.change ＪＯＳＰ[--/X0022/M9174/Ymn42] Inp. Circuit No: −−−
F ・When this signal is ON, Jog speed is setting value of the parameter［P401］.
u ・When this signal is OFF, Jog speed is setting value of the parameter［P400］.
n ・Time lag from signal input to change motion is about 15［ｍｓ］.
c. ・Signal status changes immediately regardless to Jog direction.
Ref.・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣.
・Current Jog speed can be confirmed by「ＪＳＰ」of『Diagnosis display mode』.
Speed ＯＲ１[CN1-55pin/X001C/M9172/Ymn34] Inp. Circuit No: I-1
override ＯＲ２[CN1-53pin/X001D/M9173/Ymn35]
ＯＲ３[CN1-51pin/X001E/M9174/Ymn36]
ＯＲ４[CN1-49pin/X001F/M9175/Ymn37]
F ・Speed can be set to 10％∼150％ by 10% rate Name ＯＲ４ ＯＲ３ ＯＲ２ ＯＲ１
u (Resolution 10%) and 15 steps by this signal.
n ・Time lag from signal input to change motion bit No bit３ bit２ bit１ bit０
c. is about 15［ｍｓ］.
・OR4∼OR1 are handled as 4 bit data and when this signal is ON, corresponding bit
is '１’.
・Override rate setting value unit is [10％] and relation of signals and corresponding
bit is shown in the right tabulation.
・Motion speed can be gotten by next formula.
Motion speed ＝ Command speed × Override ratio.
However if speed after override is more than the rated speed, it is clamped at the
rated speed. (It is clamped at 120% speed in control by Speed control or Torque
control command.)
・When all of OR4∼OR1 are OFF, Override is invalid (100%).
Ref.・Set sample ： Condition OR4=OFF,OR3=ON,OR2=OFF,OR1=ON,
Motion speed ＝ Command speed ×５０［％］
・Current Speed override setting can be confirmed by『Diagnosis display mode』.
・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P739｣.
Command pulse ＣＩＨ（＊）[CN1-13pin/X0024/M9180/Ymn44] Inp. Circuit No: I-1
input inhibit
F ・When this unit is applied to measuring encoder system, this signal selects Pulse
u train command signal（FC,FC*,RC,RC*）or Encoder feedback pulse input signal for
n position feedback signal.
c. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＣＩＨ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This signal function is effective by the parameter［P600］.
・This signal logic can be changed by the parameter［P600］.

− 5-15 −
In Manual run ＭＭＯＤ[-----/X006A/M9218/Xmn12] Out. Circuit No: −−−

F ・When Run mode is Manual run, this signal is ON.

u
n
c.
Ref.・Time from Mode selection signal (MD1，MD2) change to this signal output is determined
by the parameter ［P706］set.（Time lag：［P706］setting value ＋ about 20［ｍｓ］）.
・In executing Auto. pre-load with compact absolute specification, this signal is OFF.
・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external input signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』 becomes "1".

− 5-16 −
 Zero return run mode signals
Forward jog ＦＪ[CN1-3pin/X0018/M9168/Ymn30] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・When ON status is continued for more than 10［ｍｓ］, Forward zero return is
u conducted.
n. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＤＲ／ＦＪ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・Zero return method, speed, etc. , are determined by parameters［P402］∼［P410］.
Reverse jog ＲＪ[CN1-5pin/X0019/M9169/Ymn31] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・When ON status is continued for more than 10［ｍｓ］, Reverse zero return is
u conducted.
n. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＴＬ／ＲＪ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・Zero return method, speed, etc. , are determined by parameters［P402］∼［P410］.
Zero ＺＬＳ[CN1-43pin/--/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-2
return
decel.
F ・When this signal is ON in Zero return, Zero return decel. is started.
u In standard Zero return, this signal shall be ON from Zero return decel. start and
n completion（On status is retained at Zero position.）.
c. ・If this signal is already ON when Zero return motion starts, a motor once runs
opposite to Zero return direction, and after confirming OFF condition of this signal,
runs forward.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＺＬＳ］of LCD module is lit.
Hold ＨＬＤ[CN1-41pin/X0004/M9148/Ymn04] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・Run motion is held when ON signal of this signal is inputted for more than 10 [ｍｓ].
u ・At Hold status, ［ＨＬＤ］of LCD module is lit.
n.
Ref.・To cancel Hold status, turn this signal OFF and turn Forward jog signal (FJ) or
Reverse jog signal (RJ) ON.
Posi.complete ＰＮ[CN1-52pin/X0064/M9212/Xmn04] Out. Circuit No.：O-2
F ・This is ON when Positioning is completed.
u ・This signal is OFF at｛〔Zero return start］, 〔Run mode change〕, 〔Servo OFF〕and
n ［Alarm occurrence］, and ON timing of ［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear,
c. and Program cancel signals ］｝
・When this signal is ON, ［ＰＮ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P749｣.
Rough matching ＰＲＦ[CN1-56pin/X0065/M9213/Xmn05] Out. Circuit No.：O-2
F ・This is ON when Positioning is completed.
u ・This signal is OFF at 〔Zero return start］, 〔Run mode change〕, 〔Servo OFF〕.
n ［Alarm occurrence］, and ［ ON timing of Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear,
c. and Program cancel signals ］｝
・When this signal is ON, ［ＰＲＦ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter ｢P740｣.
In Zero return run ＨＭＯＤ[-----/X006B/M9219/Xmn13] Out. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When Run mode is Zero return run mode, this signal is ON.
u.
Ref.・Time from Mode selection signal (MD1，MD2) change to this signal output is determined
by the parameter ［P706］set.（Time lag：［P706］setting value ＋ about 20［ｍｓ］）。
・In executing Auto. pre-load with compact absolute specification, this signal is OFF.
・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external input signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』 becomes "1".
○ Speed override signal function is same as the function in Manual run mode.
○ Command pulse input inhibit signal function is same as the function in Manual run mode.

− 5-17 −
 Auto. run mode signals
Auto. start ＰＳＴ[CN1-39pin/X0003/M9147/Ymn03] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・When ON status is continued for more than 10［ｍｓ］, Auto. run by specified address
u command starts.
n ・This signal works as Hold in Auto. run, and re-start signal in Block stop status.
c. ・［ＰＳＴ］of LCD module is lit when ON of this signal is detected, and lit OFF
when Auto. run is completed or stopped.
Ref.・Auto. start signal thorough CN1-39 pin can be inhibited by External start inhibit
signal (EPIH).
Address ＳＳ１[CN1-20pin/X0008/M9152/Ymn10] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
set ＳＳ２[CN1-18pin/X0009/M9153/Ymn11]
ＳＳ３[CN1-16pin/X000A/M9154/Ymn12]
ＰＳ４[CN1-14pin/X000B/M9155/Ymn13]
ＰＳ５[CN1-12pin/X000C/M9156/Ymn14]
ＰＳ６[CN1-10pin/X000D/M9157/Ymn15]
ＰＳ７[CN1-8pin/X000E/M9158/Ymn16]
ＰＳ８[CN1-6pin/X000F/M9159/Ymn17]
F Name ＰＳ８ ＰＳ７ ＰＳ６ ＰＳ５ ＰＳ４ ＳＳ３ ＳＳ２ ＳＳ１
u
n bit No bit７ bit６ bit５ bit４ bit３ bit２ bit１ bit０
c.
・This signal specifies start address of Auto. run.
・At the time of inputting Auto. start signal (PST), this is read as executing
address data.
・Addresses 0∼255 can be set by this signal.
・PS8∼SS1 are handled as 8bit data and when this signal is ON, corresponding
bit is‘１’.
・Relation of signals and corresponding bit is in the above tabulation.
Ref.・Set sample ： PS8=OFF,PS7=ON,PS6=ON,PS5=ON,PS4=ON,SS3=OFF,SS2=ON,SS1=ON
Address set value is 123
・Current Address setting status can be confirmed by『Diagnosis display mode』.
・This external input signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameters (P737-P738).
・In case of a controller which has sequence function in it, address can be set by
device data as well as the above method.
By those methods, any of 0 ∼ 279 addresses can be executed（Start）.
Setting methods can be referred to the separate instruction manual「Volume ＳＱＢ」.

− 5-18 −
Hold ＨＬＤ[CN1-41pin/X0004/M9148/Ymn04] Inp. Circuit No.：I-1
F ・Run motion is held when ON signal of this signal is inputted for more than 10 [ｍｓ].
u ・At Hold status, ［ＨＬＤ］of LCD module is lit.
n.
Ref.・To cancel Hold status, turn this signal OFF and turn Auto. start signal (PST) ON.
External trigger ＴＲＧ[CN1-47pin/--/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-2
F ・When ON of this signal is inputted in Positioning for more than 200[μｓ], at the
u time Positioning data in executing are cancelled and Positioning set by External
n. trigger positioning data is conducted.
c. ・［ＴＲＧ］of LCD module is lit when ON of this signal is detected, and lit OFF
when Positioning is completed.
Ref.・Receipt of signal can be changed to ｢ＯＮ edge｣ or ｢ＯＮ level｣ by the parameter
［P411］. When ｢ＯＮ level｣ was selected and ON before executing commands, from start
of Auto. run, External trigger positioning is executed.
M complete ＭＦＩＮ[J5-A20pin/X0031/M9193/Ymn61] Inp. Circuit No.：I-5
F ・When this signal is ON, M strobe output signal (MSTB) is OFF and then next command
u will be executed.
n. ・If M output command is inputted when this signal is ON, M strobe signal is not turned
ON. This signal shall be OFF to turn M strobe signal ON.
Ref.・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal of CN1 by parameters
｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".
Block stop ＢＳＴＰ[-----/X0033/M9195/Ymn63] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When this signal is ON in executing Auto. run command, Auto. run stops at
u a block end, and becomes in waiting for re-start (Block stop) status.
n. ・If Auto. run is started when this signal is ON, Auto. run stops after executing 1
block and becomes in waiting for re-start status.
Ref.・Whether this signal shall be detected or not, and how to conduct processing after
this signal is detected depends on a command.
・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal of by parameters
｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".
Program cancel ＰＣＡＮ[-----/X0034/M9196/Ymn64] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When this signal is ON in executing Auto. run command, Auto. run is cancelled
u （Stop of Auto. run / release of Hold status / release of block stop status).
n ・When this signal is ON in running a motor, the motor conducts decel. stop in
c. accordance with Decel. time selection of individual command.
・In motor stop status or after a motor stops, Auto. run is in waiting for re-start
status by Address set.
Ref.・Effective signal width is minimum 10［ｍｓ］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal of by parameters
｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".
Ext.auto start inhibit ＥＰＩＨ[-----/X0035/M9197/Ymn65] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When this signal is ON, Auto. start signal of the external input (PST signal of
u. CN1-39 pin) is inhibited. (However, Auto. start signals of Serial communication,
Sequence control, Remote control device are not inhibited.)
Ref.・If External auto. start inhibit signal (EPIH) is OFF when External auto. start signal
is ON, Auto. start signal is accepted.
・This signal can be allocated to an external input signal of by parameters
｢P737-P739｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external input signal by parameters ｢P737-P739｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＰＳＩＮ」or「ＯＲＩＮ」of
『Diagnosis display mode』becomes "1".

− 5-19 −
ＢＣＤ D11[J5-B11pin/-/-/-]，D12[J5-A12pin/-/-/-]，D14[J5-B12pin/-/-/-] Inp. Circuit No.
data D18[J5-A13pin/-/-/-]，D21[J5-B13pin/-/-/-]，D22[J5-A14pin/-/-/-] ：I-5
input D24[J5-B14pin/-/-/-]，D28[J5-A15pin/-/-/-]，D31[J5-B15pin/-/-/-]
D32[J5-A16pin/-/-/-]，D34[J5-B16pin/-/-/-]，D38[J5-A17pin/-/-/-]
D41[J5-B17pin/-/-/-]，D42[J5-A18pin/-/-/-]，D44[J5-B18pin/-/-/-]
D48[J5-A19pin/-/-/-]，D51[J5-B3pin /-/-/-]，D52[J5-A4pin /-/-/-]
D54[J5-B4pin /-/-/-]，D58[J5-A5pin /-/-/-]，D61[J5-B5pin /-/-/-]
D62[J5-A6pin /-/-/-]，D64[J5-B6pin /-/-/-]，D68[J5-A7pin /-/-/-]
D71[J5-B7pin /-/-/-]，D72[J5-A8pin /-/-/-]，D74[J5-B8pin /-/-/-]
D78[J5-A9pin /-/-/-]，D81[J5-B9pin /-/-/-]，D82[J5-A10pin/-/-/-]
D84[J5-B10pin/-/-/-]，D88[J5-A11pin/-/-/-]，D−[J5-B19pin/-/-/-]
F ・When “DIG BCD”is selected by the parameter［P714］and numeric value data of BCD
u code is set by an external unit, data can be inputted to Index data No. IX.
n ・Numeric value data setting range is -99999999∼99999999, 8 digits（with ±）.
c. ・When BCD is ON, it means“１”, and when mark data is ON, it means “−”.
・If data other than BCD codes are inputted, they are ignored and last Index data
is retained.
・When “DIG BCD”is selected by the parameter, by connecting Digital switch unit
“SWU-501B" (Max. 3 lines) or “SWU-501C”(１ line), setting value can be stored in
Index data area (IX55∼IX57).
Posi.complete ＰＮ[CN1-52pin/X0064/M9212/Xmn04] Out. Circuit No.：O-2
F ・This is ON when difference of current position and positioning data is less than the
u value set by the parameter［P202］after Positioning command is completed.
n ・This signal is OFF at 〔Auto. run start］, 〔Run mode change〕, 〔Servo OFF〕and
［Alarm occurrence］, and ON timing of ［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear,
c. and Program cancel signals ］｝
・When this signal is ON, ［ＰＮ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・When Auto. start signal is OFF, this signal can be OFF by the parameter［P719］set.
・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter［P740］.
Rough matching ＰＲＦ[CN1-56pin/X0065/M9213/Xmn05] Out. Circuit No.：O-2
F ・This is ON when Positioning starts and difference of current position and positioning
u data is less than the value set by the parameter［P703］.
n ・This signal is OFF at｛〔Auto. run start］, 〔Run mode change〕, 〔Servo OFF〕and
［Alarm occurrence］, and ON timing of ［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear,
c. and Program cancel signals ］｝
・When this signal is ON, ［ＰＲＦ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by the
parameter［P740］.
Auto.run ready ＰＲＤＹ[-----/X0069/M9217/Xmn11] Out. Circuit No.：−−
F ・This signal is ON when Auto. start signal (PST) is「In receivable status」（ Waiting
u for Auto. run start, Hold, waiting for re-start，waiting for re-start in Block stop.
n ・This signal is OFF at｛〔Auto. run start］, 〔Run mode change〕, 〔Servo OFF〕and
c. ［Alarm occurrence］, ON timing of ［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear,
and Program cancel signals ］and when ［Zero return is not completed while Zero return
complete condition is set to Auto. run permit condition (409)］｝
Ref.・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』 becomes "1".
Program end ＰＥＮＤ[-----/X0068/M9216/Xmn10] Out. Circuit No.：−−
F ・This signal is ON when PEND command is executed in Auto. run or one of POS / HOME /
u INDX is executed completely.
n ・This signal is OFF at｛〔Auto. run start］, 〔Run mode change〕, 〔Servo OFF〕and
c. ［Alarm occurrence］, and ON timing of ［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear,
and Program cancel signals ］｝.
Ref.・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』 becomes "1".

− 5-20 −
In Auto. run ＡＭＯＤ[-----/X006C/M9220/Xmn14] Out. Circuit No.：−−
F ・This signal is ON when Run mode is Auto. run.
u.
Ref.・Time from Mode selection signal (MD1，MD2) change to this signal output is determined
by the parameter ［P706］set.（Time lag：［P706］setting value ＋ about 20［ｍｓ］）。
・In executing Auto. pre-load with compact absolute specification, this signal is OFF.
・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』 becomes "1".
Gen. OUT1[J5-A21pin/X0070/M9224/Xmn20],OUT2[J5-B21pin/X0071/M9225/Xmn21] Out. Circuit
out. OUT3[J5-A22pin/X0072/M9226/Xmn22],OUT4[J5-B22pin/X0073/M9227/Xmn23] No.：O-6
OUT5[J5-A23pin/X0074/M9228/Xmn24],OUT6[J5-B23pin/X0075/M9229/Xmn25]
OUT7[J5-A24pin/X0076/M9230/Xmn26],OUT8[J5-B24pin/X0077/M9231/Xmn27]
F ・This is outputted when a command to enable a general output is executed in Auto.
u run.
n ・This signal is retained until a command to enable next general output is executed.
c. ・Out 8 ∼ OUT 1 are handled as binary data（8 bit） and they are corresponding to
. bit 7 ∼ 0 respectively. When a corresponding bit is “１”, the output is ON and
when“０”, it is OFF.
・This signal is OFF at｛〔Run mode change〕,〔Servo OFF〕and［Alarm occurrence］, and
ON timing of ［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear, and Program cancel signals ］｝.
Ref.・This signal output terminal is common to M output signal (M01∼ M80) output terminal.
・An output signal is selected by the parameter［P717］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external output signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external output signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』becomes "1".
M M01[J5-A21pin/X0080/M9240/Xmn40]，M02[J5-B21pin/X0081/M9241/Xmn41] Out. Circuit
output M04[J5-A22pin/X0082/M9242/Xmn42]，M08[J5-B22pin/X0083/M9243/Xmn43] No.：O-6
M10[J5-A23pin/X0084/M9244/Xmn44]，M20[J5-B23pin/X0085/M9245/Xmn45]
M40[J5-A24pin/X0086/M9246/Xmn46]，M80[J5-B24pin/X0087/M9247/Xmn47]
F ・This is outputted when a command to enable M output is executed in Auto. run.
u ・This signal is retained until a command to enable next M output is executed.
n ・M 80 ∼ M 1 are handled as 2 bit BCD code（8 bit）. When a corresponding bit is
c. “１”, the M output is ON and when“０”, it is OFF.
・This signal is OFF at｛〔Run mode change〕,〔Servo OFF〕and［Alarm occurrence］, and
ON timing of［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear, and Program cancel signals ］｝.
Ref.・This signal output terminal is common to General output signal (Out 01 ∼ out 080)
output terminal.
・An output signal is selected by the parameter［P717］.
・This signal can be allocated to an external output signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external output signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』becomes "1".
M strobe ＭＳＴＢ[J5-A28pin/X008E/M9254/Xmn56] Out. Circuit No.：O-6
F ・When a command to enable M output is executed in Auto. run, this is ON as Strobe
u signal after completion of the command .
n ・This signal is retained until a command to enable next M output is executed.
c. ・This signal is OFF at｛〔Run mode change〕,〔Servo OFF〕and［Alarm occurrence］, and
. ON timing of［ M complete signal, Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear, and Program
cancel signals ］｝.
Ref.・This signal output terminal is common to Software limit switch A signal (SLSA)
output terminal.
・An output signal is selected by the parameter［P718］.
・If Next command is executed completely when M complete signal (MFIN) is ON, this
signal is not turned ON. M complete signal shall be OFF to turn this signal ON.
・This signal can be allocated to an external output signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When this signal is allocated to an external output signal by parameters ｢P740-P741｣
and ON status, the corresponding signal allocated by「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』becomes "1".

− 5-21 −
 Digital swi- ＣＭ２[J5-A25pin/-/-/-],ＣＭ３[J5-B25pin/-/-/-] Out. Circuit No.：O-6
tch common ＣＭ４[J5-A26pin/-/-/-],ＣＭ５[J5-B26pin/-/-/-]
output ＣＭ６[J5-A27pin/-/-/-],ＣＭ７[J5-B27pin/-/-/-]

F ・This is a signal to store data when Digital switch unit“SWU-501B”(Max. 3 lines) or

u “SWU-501C (1 line) is connected to BCD data input signals, and setting value is written
n. to Index data.
Ref.・When SWU-501 or SWU 501C is connected and setting value is written to Index data,
select “DIG COM”by the parameter［P714］.
Speed command ＩＮＨ[CN1-34pin/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-8
Analog signal
F ・When External speed selection (SEL.0) is executed by Speed control command, a motor
u runs at the speed proportional to Speed command voltage.
n ・A motor runs at rated speed when DC ± 10 V is inputted.
c ・Motor rotating direction is forward by positive voltage and reverse by negative
t voltage referred to GND terminal voltage.
i ・Speed command voltage set to motor rated speed can be changed by the parameter (124).
o ・Offset adjustment of Speed command voltage can be conducted by the parameter (P125).
n ・Accel./ Decel. time can be set by parameters (P213,P216).
・This signal functions as External speed limit when Torque control command is
executed.
・This analog input value is written to Index data No. IX 64.
Ref.・Speed control command and Torque control command are available for 2 types,
NCS-FI/FS1 and NCS-FI/FS2.
Torque command ＴＱＨ[CN1-33pin/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-9
Analog signal
F ・When External torque selection (SEL.0) is executed by Torque control command, a
u motor outputs torque proportional to Torque command voltage.
n ・A motor outputs 300 % torque when DC ± 10 V is inputted.
c ・Drive torque direction of a motor is forward by positive voltage and reverse by
t negative voltage referred to GND terminal voltage.
i ・Offset adjustment of Torque command voltage can be conducted by the parameter (P126).
o. ・This analog input value is written to Index data No. IX 65.
Ref.・Torque control command is available for 2 types, NCS-FI/FS1 and NCS-FI/FS2.
○ Speed override signal function is same as the function in Manual run mode.
○ Command pulse input inhibit signal function is same as the function in Manual run mode.
○ Zero return decel. signal function is same as the function in Zero return run mode.

− 5-22 −
 Pulse train run mode signals
Cmmd.pls in.inhibit ＣＩＨ（＊）[CN1-13pin/X0024/M9180/Ymn44] Inp. Circuit No.：I-2
F ・When this signal is ON, Pulse train command is invalid and a motor goes into Servo
u lock status.
n. ・When this signal is ON in motor running, the motor moves deviation pulse amount in
Position deviation counter and stops.
・When this signal is ON, ［ＣＩＨ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This signal function can be disabled by the parameter P600］.
・This signal logic can be changed by the parameter［P600］.
Pulse train ＦＣ[CN1-59pin/--/--/--]，ＦＣ＊[CN1-57pin/--/--/--] Inp. Circuit No.：I-3
command ＲＣ[CN1-65pin/--/--/--]，ＲＣ＊[CN1-63pin/--/--/--]
F ・Command pulse types are 90ﾟ different phase pulse, Directional pulse, and
u Directional + feed pulse.
n ・All the types can be applied to Line driver method and Open collector method.
c 【Connecting method】
t ・In case of Line driver method, connect line driver output to FC-FC* and RC-RC*,
i respectively.
o ・In case of Open collector method, connect +5V ∼ +24V of an external power supply
n unit to FC and RC, and connect open collector output to FC*,RC* and OV of an
external power supply unit.
【Command pulse method】
・In case of 9 0 ﾟ different phase Pulse train command, when a pulse train (B phase)
between RC-RC* or RC*-0V is 9 0 ﾟ ahead of a pulse train (A phase) between FC-FC* or
FC*-0V, a motor runs forward and when 9 0 ﾟ behind, the motor runs reverse.
・In case of Directional pulse train command, when Pulse train is inputted to FC-FC*
or FC*-0V, a motor runs forward and when to RC-RC* or RC*-0V, the motor runs reverse.
・In case of Directional + feed pulse command, input directional signal to
RC-RC* or RC*-0V or input feed pulse to FC-FC* or FC*-0V.
・Directional signal becomes a forward motion command when RC is "L" and RC* is "H"
and when RC is "H" and RC* is "L" becomes a reverse motion command in case of Line
driver method. And in case of Open collector method, it becomes a forward motion
command when RC* and 0V terminals are opened and a reverse motion command when RC*
and 0V terminals are short-circuited.
【Parameter 】
・Command pulse type is selected by the parameter［P602］. Multiplication ratio of
90ﾟdifferent phase pulse train command can be selected.
・A motor can run reverse by Forward directional pulse train command by the parameter
［P601］.
【Pulse train command input frequency】
・Max. input frequency of Pulse train command is as below.
Line driver method
90°different phase pulse ：２５０kpps（４ times : １Mpps）
Directional pulse ：２５０kpps
Open collector method ：２００kpps
・Command pulse width shall be 2 μｓ or more.
Ref.・In the point of noise resistance, Line driver method is recommended.
・This unit can be also used as a position feedback input signal in measuring encoder
system.
Pls. train ＤＴ[J2-3,7pin/--/--/--]，ＤＴ＊[J2-4,8pin/--/--/--] I/O Circuit No.：
communicat. ＣＫ[J2-1,5pin/--/--/--]，ＣＫ＊[J2-2,6pin/--/--/--] IO-2
F ・When this signal is connected to other NCS-FI/FS or NPS-FI/FS, Pulse train data
u command transmission and receipt is conducted.
n. ・When Pulse train is transmitted, Pulse train to be transmitted is selected by the
parameter (P608).
・Pulse train run can be conducted by Received pulse train selected by parameters
(P602,P608).
Ref.・Pulse train communication can be referred to items of parameters (P602,P608).

− 5-23 −
Posi.complete ＰＮ[CN1-52pin/X0064/M9212/Xmn04] Out. Circuit No.：O-2
F ・When Deviation counter value is less than parameter［P202］set, this signal is ON.
u ・This signal is OFF at｛〔Run mode change〕,〔Servo OFF〕and［Alarm occurrence］, and
n ON timing of［ Emergency stop, Reset, Deviation clear, and Program cancel signals ］｝.
c. ・When this signal is ON, ［ＰＮ］of LCD module is lit.
Ref.・This external output signal can be allocated to other external output signal by
parameters ｢P740｣.
In Pulse train run ＰＭＯＤ[-----/X006D/M9221/Xmn15] Inp. Circuit No.：−−
F ・When Run mode is「Pulse train run mode」, this signal is ON.
u
n
c.
Ref.・Time from Mode selection signal (MD1，MD2) change to this signal output is determined
by the parameter ［P706］set.（Time lag：［P706］setting value ＋ about 20［ｍｓ］）。
・In executing Auto. pre-load with compact absolute specification, this signal is OFF.
・It can be allocated to an external output signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣.
・When it is allocated to an external input signal by the parameters ｢P740-P741｣, if
it is ON, the corresponding signal allocated by 「ＣＮ１０」of『Diagnosis display
mode』 becomes "1".

− 5-24 −
 ５−２−３ Input and output interface
Input and output signal types and those equivalent circuits are shown in the next list.
Individual Input and output signal types are described in Input and output terminal and
circuit No. columns of ［Tab.５−１Input and output signal list］.
Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit
Insulat. method Photo coupler
Ｉ−１ Voltage range DC10.2∼26.4Ｖ CN1
Controller
〔 ＋Ｖ＝
Ripple ratio Within 5% ＋12 ∼24 Ｖ 〕 62,64 ＋Ｖ

Associa.signal Rated input Ap.2.5mA/DC12V ＋Ｖ a contact associated signal

current (/1 pnt.) Ap.5.0mA/DC24V
4.7KΩ
ＰＳＴ，ＣＩＨ Input resistor Apr.4.7ｋΩ b contact
ＥＭＧ＊ Input filter Apr.1.5ms
ＦＯＴ＊ time constant
ＲＯＴ＊ Use a micro current switching relay or an Open collector output transistor
ＳＯＮ（＊） for the contact. Signals without “＊”symbol are positive-true logic.
ＲＳＴ，ＣＬＲ It is ON when the contact is closed, and OFF when it is opened.
ＨＬＤ，ＰＣ Signals with“＊”symbol are negative-true logic.
ＳＳ１∼ＰＳ８ It is ON when the contact is opened, and OFF when it is closed.
ＯＲ１∼ＯＲ４ Logic of signals with“ （＊）”can be changed by the parameter.
ＦＪ，ＲＪ
ＭＤ１／２
Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit
Insulat. method Photo coupler CN1
Controller
Ｉ−２ Voltage range DC10.2∼26.4Ｖ 〔 ＋ Ｖ ＝
＋12 ∼24 Ｖ 〕 62,64 ＋Ｖ
Ripple ratio Within ５％
＋Ｖ a contact
Associa.signal Rated input Ap.2.5mA/DC12V associated signal

current (1/ pnt.) Ap.5.0mA/DC24V 4.7KΩ

b contact
ＺＬＳ，ＴＲＧ Input resistor Apr. 4.7ｋΩ
Input filter Apro. 120μｓ
time constant
Use a micro current switching relay or an Open collector output transistor
for the contact. Signals without “＊”symbol are positive-true logic.
It is ON when the contact is closed, and OFF when it is opened.
Logic of signals with“ （＊）”can be changed by the parameter.

Circuit No. E Insulat. method Photo coupler

l Min.inp. pls.width １μｓ
Ｉ−３ e Input method Line driver method Open collector method
c. Max.inp.frequency ２５０ｋｐｐｓ ２００ｋｐｐｓ
Associa.signal S Line driver 26LS or equivalent −−−−−−−
p Transis.saturat. V −−−−− ０．９Ｖ or less
ＦＣ，ＦＣ＊ e Voltage range −−−−− DC4.75∼26.4Ｖ
ＲＣ，ＲＣ＊ c. Rated inp. current Apro. 10mA/ 1 point
C
i External
CN1 power CN1
r ５９ ＦＣ supply ５９ ＦＣ

c 26LS31
u ５７ ＦＣ＊ High speed ５７ ＦＣ＊ High speed
photo photo
i ６５ ＲＣ coupler
isolation
６５ ＲＣ coupler
isolation
t 26LS31
６３ ＲＣ＊ ６３ ＲＣ＊

66,68 ＦＧ 66,68 ＦＧ
Controller Controller
(Cable length 3 m or less)
(Cable length 1.5 m or less)
［Line driver method］ ［Open collector method］

※In some case, it is better to connect Pulse train command output side
and each controller GND.

− 5-25 −
Circuit No. E. In forward Ｔ
S motor motion,
Ｉ−４ p B phase is A phase
ΔtΔt ｔ＝ Ｔ／４
c. ahead of A
Associa.signal phase. B phase Δｔ＝±Ｔ／８
ｔ ｔ ｔ ｔ

Encoder
feedback pulse C CN2
+ -
input i Positive polarity Sign. Sig.
r A phs. Ａ Ａ＊

３３０Ω
26LS31 26LS32
Ａ，Ａ＊ c Negative polarity B phs. Ｂ Ｂ＊
Ｂ，Ｂ＊ u ＦＧ ＦＧ Z phs. Ｚ Ｚ＊
Encoder Controller
Ｚ，Ｚ＊ i Connector・FG fixture SD SD＊
SD，SD＊ t
Encoder feedback pulse shall be Line driver (26LS or equivalent) output.

Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit

Insulat. method Photo coupler
Ｐ２
Ｉ−５ Voltage range DC10.2∼26.4Ｖ 2 ＋Ｖ Controller
Ripple ratio Within 5%
Associa.signal Rated input Ap.2.5mA/DC12V Ｊ５
B1,B2 ＋Ｖ
current (1 point) Ap.5.0mA/DC24V
＋Ｖ a contact
ＭＦＩＮ Input resistor Apro. 4.7ｋΩ Associated signal

Ｄ１１∼Ｄ８８ Input filter Apro. 2ms 〔＋Ｖ ＝＋１２∼２４Ｖ〕 4.7KΩ

Ｄ− time constant
Use a micro current switching relay or an Open collector output transistor
for the contact. Signals without “＊”symbol are positive-true logic.
It is ON when the contact is closed, and OFF when it is opened.
Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit
Voltage range DC 0∼10Ｖ ＣＮ１ Controller
Ｉ−６ Use twist-pair cables and be ６６
ＦＧ
（６８）
sure to connect the shield to Torque limit command
Associa.signal shield connection terminal (FG). ０∼１０Ｖ
３０ ＴＬ＋ ２０ＫΩ
−
（ ２ ９ ）（ Ｔ Ｌ − ）
２７ ＧＮＤ ＋

ＴＬ＋
ＴＬ−

Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit

Voltage range DC 0∼10Ｖ
Controller
Ｉ−７ Use twist-pair cables and be ＣＮ２
Connector・FG fixture ＦＧ
sure to connect the shield to ＋５Ｖ

Associa.signal the connector FG metal fitting. Thermister −

０∼１０Ｖ １７ ＴＨＭ ＋

ＴＨＭ This signal is effective only １８ ＧＮＤ

when a motor equipped with a

thermal is used.

− 5-26 −
Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit
Voltage range DC -10∼10Ｖ ＣＮ１ Controller
Ｉ−８ Use twist-pair cables and be ６６
ＦＧ

sure to connect the shield to （６８）

Speed command
Associa.signal shield connection terminal (FG). ０∼±１０Ｖ ３４ ＩＮＨ ２０ＫΩ
−
３１ ＧＮＤ ＋

ＩＮＨ

Circuit No. Electric specification Circuit

Voltage range DC -10∼10Ｖ ＣＮ１ Controller
Ｉ−９ Use twist-pair cables and be ６６
ＦＧ

sure to connect the shield to （６８）

Torque command
Associa.signal shield connection terminal (FG). ０∼±１０Ｖ
３３ ＴＱＨ
２０ＫΩ
−
３１ ＧＮＤ ＋
ＴＱＨ

− 5-27 −
Circuit No. Electric specification Signals without "＊" symbol are positive-
Insula.method Photo-coupler true logic. When this and COM1 are closed,
Ｏ−１ Max.load Volt. ＤＣ３０Ｖ it is ON. Logic of signals with "（＊）"
Max.load crnt. 50mA / 1 point can be changed by the parameter. COM1 is
Associ. signal Leak current 0.1mA or less isolated to COM of circuit No.O-2 and OMD
Saturated vol. 1.0V or less of O-3.
ＲＤＹ C CN1
Controller
ＡＬＭ（＊） i Associated signal
ＣＲ
or ＬＡＭＰ

r
＋Ｖ Dark current resistor ＋Ｖ
c
ＣＯＭ１
u 40
i
t When inductive load as a relay, etc. is coneected, be sure to insert a
diode, in parallel with the load. In case of lamp load, insert a dark
current resistor to keep current (includes rush current) lower than the
rated value.
Circuit No. Electric specification Signals without "＊" symbol are positive-
Insula.method Photo-coupler true logic. When this and COM are closed,
Ｏ−２ Max.load Volt. ＤＣ３０Ｖ it is ON. Logic of signals with "（＊）"
Max.load crnt. 50mA / 1 point can be changed by the parameter. COM is
Associ. signal Leak current 0.1mA or less isolated to COM1 of circuit No.O-1 and OMD
Saturated vol. 1.0V or less of O-3.
ＷＮＧ（＊） C CN1
Controller
ＳＺ i Associated signal
ＣＲ ＬＡＭＰ
or
ＰＮ r
＋Ｖ Dark current resistor ＋Ｖ
ＰＲＦ c
ＣＯＭ
ＬＩＭ u
36,38
ＢＲＫ i
t When inductive load as a relay, etc. is coneected, be sure to insert a
diode, in parallel with the load. In case of lamp load, insert a dark
current resistor to keep current (includes rush current) lower than the
rated value.
Circuit No. Electric specification Signals without "＊" symbol are positive-
Insula.method Photo-coupler true logic. When this and COM are closed,
Ｏ−３ Max.load Volt. ＤＣ３０Ｖ it is ON. Logic of signals with "（＊）"
Max.load crnt. 50mA / 1 point can be changed by the parameter. OMD is
Associ. signal Leak current 0.1mA or less isolated to COM1 of circuit No.O-1 and COM
Saturated vol. 1.0V or less of O-2.
ＯＣＭ C CN1
Controller
i ＯＣＭ ＣＲ or ＬＡＭＰ
r 58
＋Ｖ Dark current resistor ＋Ｖ
c
u ＯＭＯ
60
i
t When inductive load as a relay, etc. is coneected, be dure to insert a
diode, in parallel with the load. In case of lamp load, insert a dark
current resistor to keep current (includes rysh current) lower than the
rated value.

− 5-28 −
Circuit No. C
CN1
i EA ,EB ,EM

３３０Ω
Ｏ−４ r 26LS31 26LS32
c
EA*,EB*,EM* GND
Associ. signal u
GND ＦＧ
i External unit
Encoder pulse t Controller ＦＧ

output
ＥＡ
ＥＡ＊ Since Line driver (26LS31 or equivalent) is used for outputs, interface
ＥＢ it with Line receiver (26LS32 or equivalent). Terminating resistor of
ＥＢ＊ receiving side shall be 300Ω（1/2W or more）.
ＥＭ In motor CCW rotation, B phase is outputted ahead of A phase.
ＥＭ＊ Relation of A and B phases is always corresponding to motor rotating
ＡＤ direction and unchanged by rotating direction set of the parameter.
ＡＤ＊ This unit is unstable for about max.2 seconds after power is turned ON.
Circuit No. C
i ＋１５Ｖ Controller
Ｐ１
Ｏ−５ r
− １Ｋ
c ＭＯＮ２ １
ＭＯＮ１ ２
Associ. signal u ＋

i Operational
amplifier
ＧＮＤ ４

Analog monitor t −１５Ｖ

Ｅ

ＭＯＮ１
ＭＯＮ２
ＩＮＨ０ When 1m or longer cable is used, apply a twist-pair shield cable and connect
the shield to the controller ground terminal (E).
Circuit No. Electric specification Signals without "＊" symbol are positive-
Insula.method Photo-coupler true logic. When this and COM are closed,
Ｏ−６ Max.load Volt. ＤＣ３０Ｖ it is ON. Logic of signals with "（＊）"
Max.load crnt. 50mA / 1 point can be changed by the parameter. COM is
Associ. signal Leak current 0.1mA or less isolated to COM1 of circuit No.O-1 and COM
Saturated vol. 1.0V or less of O-2.
ＯＵＴ１∼ C Ｊ５
ＯＵＴ８ i Controller Associated signal
ＣＲ ＬＡＭＰ
Ｍ０１∼Ｍ８０ r or
＋Ｖ Dark current resistor ＋Ｖ
ＭＳＴＢ c
ＳＬＳＡ u ＣＯＭ
A2 , A3
ＳＬＳＢ i
COM Ｐ２
ＣＭ２∼ＣＭ７ t 1

When inductive load as a relay, etc. is connected, be sure to insert a

diode, in parallel with the load. In case of lamp load, insert a dark
current resistor to keep current (includes rush current) lower than the
rated value.

− 5-29 −
Circuit No. C Ｊ1
i TXD(A) 2
ＩＯ−１ r TXD(A) 1

３３０Ω
RLT(B) 10
c MC34051
8
３３０Ω TXD(B)
Associ. signal u TXD(B) 9
i RXD(A) 4
RXD(A) 5
Serial t ３３０Ω 3
MC34051 RLR(A)
RXD(B) 12
ＴＸＤ(A) ＋５Ｖ
RXD(B) 11
C5V 7
ＴＸＤ(B)
ＲＸＤ(A) GND 14
GND
ＲＸＤ(B)
ＦＧ ＦＧ
ＲＬＲ(A) Controller External unit

Connector・FG fixture
communication

Communication method is RS-422A.

RLR(A) and RXD(A) terminals of a communication terminating controller shall
be connected to enable an internal terminating resistor. And a terminating
resistor shall be connected to an external equipment as well.
Circuit No. C
i Ｊ２ +5V
1KΩ
ＩＯ−２ r
DT 3
c
DT 7
Associ. signal u
i DT* 4
Pulse train t DT* 8
communication 1KΩ 75176B
ＤＴ
+5V
ＤＴ＊ 1KΩ
ＣＫ CK 1
ＣＫ＊ CK 5

CK* 2
CK* 6
FG 1KΩ 75176B
FG Connector frame

Communication method is RS-485. Connect a connector for a terminating

resistor to a communication terminating controller.

− 5-30 −
５−３ Connector pin location
５−３−１ Control I/O signal connector（ＣＮ１）
No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
１ ＲＳＴ Reset ３５ ＳＯＮ（＊） Servo ON
２ ＦＯＴ＊ Forward over travel ３６ ＣＯＭ Output signal common
３ ＦＪ Forward jog ３７ ＥＭＧ＊ Emergency stop
４ ＲＯＴ＊ Reverse over travel ３８ ＣＯＭ Output signal common
５ ＲＪ Reverse jog ３９ ＰＳＴ Auto. start
６ ＰＳ８ Address set 8 ４０ ＣＯＭ１ Output signal common 1
７ ＰＣ Remote/ Local change ４１ ＨＬＤ Hold
８ ＰＳ７ Address set 7 ４２ ＲＤＹ Servo ready
９ ＭＤ２ Mode selection 2 ４３ ＺＬＳ Zero point decel.
１０ ＰＳ６ Address set 6 ４４ ＡＬＭ（＊） Alarm
１１ ＭＤ１ Mode selection 1 ４５
１２ ＰＳ５ Address set 5 ４６ ＷＮＧ（＊） Warning
１３ ＣＩＨ（＊） Command pls.inp.inhibit ４７ ＴＲＧ External trigger
１４ ＰＳ４ Address set 4 ４８ ＬＩＭ In Torque limit
１５ ＣＬＲ Deviation clear ４９ ＯＲ４ Speed override 4
１６ ＳＳ３ Address set 3 ５０ ＳＺ Speed zero
１７ ＥＡ Enco.pls.A phase out.(+) ５１ ＯＲ３ Speed override 3
１８ ＳＳ２ Address set 2 ５２ ＰＮ Positioning complete
１９ ＥＡ＊ Enco.pls.A phase out.(-) ５３ ＯＲ２ Speed override 2
２０ ＳＳ１ Address set 1 ５４ ＢＲＫ Brake release
２１ ＥＢ Enco.pls.B phase out.(+) ５５ ＯＲ１ Speed override 1
２２ ＥＭ Enco.pls.marker out.(+) ５６ ＰＲＦ Rough matching
２３ ＥＢ＊ Enco.pls.B phase out.(-) ５７ ＦＣ＊ Forward pulse command(-)
２４ ＥＭ＊ Enco.pls.marker out.(-) ５８ ＯＣＭ Encoder marker output
２５ ＡＤ ABS serial data out.(+) ５９ ＦＣ Forward pulse command(+)
２６ ＡＤ＊ ABS serial data out. (-) ６０ ＯＭＯ Encod.marker out. common
２７ ＧＮＤ ６１ ＮＣ No connection (Reserved)
Int.control power common
２８ ＧＮＤ ６２ Ｐ．２４ External control power
２９ ＴＬ− Torque limit−command ６３ ＲＣ＊ Reverse pulse command(-)
３０ ＴＬ＋ Torque limit＋command ６４ Ｐ．２４ External control power
３１ ＧＮＤ ６５ ＲＣ Reverse pulse command(+)
Int.control power common
３２ ＧＮＤ ６６ ＦＧ Shield earth
３３ ＴＱＨ Torque command ６７ ＮＣ No connection (Reserved)
３４ ＩＮＨ Speed command ６８ ＦＧ Shield earth
※１ Logic of signal code without“＊”is Positiv-true, logic of signal code with“＊”is
Negative-true and logic of signal code with“（＊）” can be changed logic by the
parameter.
Applied connector : Receptacle ／DX10A−68S (3M product)
Cable side mating connector : Soldered plug ／DX40−68P
：Case (shell) ／DX−68−CV1
※２ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

※３ Below figure is layout of the cable connector side viewed from soldered terminals.

［Tab.５−３］ Connector CN1 terminal location

− 5-31 −
５−３−２ Encoder feedback pulse input connector（ＣＮ２）
No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
１ ＧＮＤ Encoder power common １１ Ｚ Enco.marker sig. inp.(+)
２ ＧＮＤ 〃 １２ Ｚ＊ 〃 (-)
３ ＥＰ５ Encoder power （＋５Ｖ） １３ ＮＣ No connection (Reserved)
４ ＥＰ５ 〃 １４ ＮＣ No connection (Reserved)
５ ＳＤ ABS position data (+) １５ ＮＣ No connection (Reserved)
６ ＳＤ＊ 〃 (-) １６ ＮＣ No connection (Reserved)
７ Ａ Enco.pls.A phase inp.(+) １７ ＴＨＭ Thermistor input
８ Ａ＊ 〃 (-) １８ ＧＮＤ Thermistor input common
９ Ｂ Enco.pls.B phase out.(+) １９ ＦＧ Shield earth
１０ Ｂ＊ 〃 (-) ２０ ＦＧ Shield earth
Applied connector : Receptacle ／10220−52A2JL (3M product)
Cable side mating connector : Soldered plug ／10120−3000VE
：Case (Shell) ／10320−52AO−008

※１ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

※２ Below figure is layout of the cable connector side viewed from soldered terminals.

［Tab.５−４］ Connector CN2 terminal location

５−３−３ Pulse train communication connector（Ｊ２）

No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
１ ＣＫ Clock signal(+) ５ ＣＫ Clock signal(+)
２ ＣＫ＊ 〃 (-) ６ ＣＫ＊ 〃 (-)
３ ＤＴ Data signal (+) ７ ＤＴ Data signal(+)
４ ＤＴ＊ 〃 (-) ８ ＤＴ＊ 〃 (-)
Applied connector : Receptacle ／DUSB-ARB82-T11A(D2) （DDK product）
Cable side mating connector: Plug harness ／DUSB-HAN21-FBm （DDK product）
(m = 05,10,30)
※１ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

［Tab.５−５］ Connector J2 terminal location

− 5-32 −
５−３−４ Serial communication connector（Ｊ１）
No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
１ ＴＸＤ(A) Trans.data (pair:TXD(B)) ８ ＴＸＤ(B) Trans.data (pair:TXD(A))
２ ＴＸＤ(A) 〃 ９ ＴＸＤ(B) 〃
３ ＲＬＲ(A) Receiv.line end resistor １０ ＲＬＴ(B) Trans.line end resistor
４ ＲＸＤ(A) Receiv.data(pair:RXD(B)) １１ ＲＸＤ(B) Receiv.data(pair:RXD(A))
５ ＲＸＤ(A) 〃 １２ ＲＸＤ(B) 〃
６ (un-used / reserved ） １３ (un-used / reserved ）
７ Ｃ５Ｖ Int. control power + 5 １４ ＧＮＤ Int.control power common
Applied connector : Receptacle ／10214−52A2JL（3M product）
Cable side mating connector : Soldered plug ／10114−3000VE
：Case (shell) ／10314−52AO−008

※１ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

※２ Below figure is layout of the cable connector side viewed from soldered terminals
.

［Tab.５−６］ Connector J1 terminal location

５−３−５ Analog monitor connector （Ｐ１）

No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
１ ＭＯＮ２ Analog monit.out.signal1 ３ ＩＮＨ０ Speed command volt. out.
２ ＭＯＮ１ Analog monit.out.signal2 ４ ＧＮＤ Int.control power common
Applied connector : Receptacle ／IL−4P−S3FP2（JAE product）
Cable side mating connector ：Plug（compressive type）／IL−4S−S3l
※１ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

１ ２ ３ ４
MON2 MON1 INH0 GND

［Tab.５−７］ Connector P1 terminal location

− 5-33 −
５−３−６ ＢＣＤ data input connector（Ｊ５）
No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
Ａ１ ＦＧ Shield earth Ｂ１ ＋Ｖ Exte. power（DC+12∼+24V）
Ａ２ ＣＯＭ Output signal common Ｂ２ ＋Ｖ Exte. power（DC+12∼+24V）
Ａ３ ＣＯＭ Output signal common Ｂ３ Ｄ５１ BCD data １×１０４
Ａ４ Ｄ５２ BCD data ２×１０４ Ｂ４ Ｄ５４ BCD data ４×１０４
４
Ａ５ Ｄ５８ BCD data ８×１０ Ｂ５ Ｄ６１ BCD data １×１０５
５
Ａ６ Ｄ６２ BCD data ２×１０ Ｂ６ Ｄ６４ BCD data ４×１０５
Ａ７ Ｄ６８ BCD data ８×１０５ Ｂ７ Ｄ７１ BCD data １×１０６
６
Ａ８ Ｄ７２ BCD data ２×１０ Ｂ８ Ｄ７４ BCD data ４×１０６
６
Ａ９ Ｄ７８ BCD data ８×１０ Ｂ９ Ｄ８１ BCD data １×１０７
７
Ａ10 Ｄ８２ BCD data ２×１０ Ｂ10 Ｄ８４ BCD data ４×１０７
７
Ａ11 Ｄ８８ BCD data ８×１０ Ｂ11 Ｄ１１ BCD data １×１００
Ａ12 Ｄ１２ BCD data ２×１００ Ｂ12 Ｄ１４ BCD data ４×１００
０
Ａ13 Ｄ１８ BCD data ８×１０ Ｂ13 Ｄ２１ BCD data １×１０１
１
Ａ14 Ｄ２２ BCD data ２×１０ Ｂ14 Ｄ２４ BCD data ４×１０１
１
Ａ15 Ｄ２８ BCD data ８×１０ Ｂ15 Ｄ３１ BCD data １×１０２
２
Ａ16 Ｄ３２ BCD data ２×１０ Ｂ16 Ｄ３４ BCD data ４×１０２
Ａ17 Ｄ３８ BCD data ８×１０２ Ｂ17 Ｄ４１ BCD data １×１０３
３
Ａ18 Ｄ４２ BCD data ２×１０ Ｂ18 Ｄ４４ BCD data ４×１０３
３
Ａ19 Ｄ４８ BCD data ８×１０ Ｂ19 Ｄ− Code data
Ａ20 ＭＦＩＮ M complete Ｂ20 −−−−− Un-used (never connect)
Ａ21 OUT1/M01 General out.2０ /M out. 2０ Ｂ21 OUT2/M02 General out.2１ /M out. 2１
Ａ22 OUT3/M04 General out.2２ /M out. 2２ Ｂ22 OUT4/M08 General out.2３ /M out. 2３
４ ４
Ａ23 OUT5/M10 General out.2 /M out. 2 Ｂ23 OUT6/M20 General out.2５ /M out. 2５
６ ６
Ａ24 OUT7/M40 General out.2 /M out. 2 Ｂ24 OUT8/M80 General out.2７ /M out. 2７
Ａ25 ＣＭ２ Digi.swi. 1 line L select. Ｂ25 ＣＭ３ Digi.swi. 1 line H select.
Ａ26 ＣＭ４ Digi.swi. 2 line L select. Ｂ26 ＣＭ５ Digi.swi. 2 line H select.
Ａ27 ＣＭ６ Digi.swi. 3 line L select. Ｂ27 ＣＭ７ Digi.swi. 3 line H select.
Ａ28 SLSA/MSTB Soft. switch A / M strobe Ｂ28 ＳＬＳＢ Software limit switch B
Applied connector : Receptacle ／FCN−365P056−AU （Fujitsu product）
Cable side mating connector : Soldered plug ／FCN−361J056−AU
: Case (shell) ／FCN−360C056−B
※１ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

［Tab.５−８］ Connector J5 terminal location

５−３−７ External power connector（Ｐ２）
No. Signal code Signal name No. Signal code Signal name
１ ＣＯＭ Output signal common ２ ＋Ｖ Exte. power（DC+12∼+24V）
※１ Connector for external power connection. COM is connected A2 and A3 pins of J5
connector. +V is connected to B1 and B2 pins of J5 connector.
Applied connector : Receptacle ／IL−2P−S3FP2 (JAE Product)
Cable side mating connector ：Plug（compressive type）／IL−2S−S3l
※２ Below fig. is layout of the unit connector viewed from the connector side.

※３ When external power is

１ ２ connected through J5,
this external power is
COM ＋Ｖ not necessary

［Tab.５−９］ Connector P2 terminal location

− 5-34 −
５−３−８ High speed communication connector （ＴＢ２）
No. Signal code Signal name Signal code Signal name
１ ＬＩＮＥ＋ Data cable + ２ ＬＩＮＥ＋ Data cable +
３ ＬＩＮＥ− Data cable - ４ ＬＩＮＥ− Data cable -
５ ＦＧ Shield earth ６ ＦＧ Shield earth

Above fig. is layout of the high speed communication terminal block viewed from the
unit front face. 1, 3, and 5 terminals are one pair and 2, 4, and 6 are another one pair.
The below cable is used when this unit is not a terminating unit but connected to
other units with a digital chain.
For high speed communication types, ID, jumpers, and TB2 are attached as below.
ＩＤ Jumper ＴＢ２

・・・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
１２３ １ ２ ３ ４ ５ ６
１）ＩＤ
This sets node ID No. of high speed communication.
① For Sequence control + high speed communication types, be sure to set "0" to
the node ID No.
② For high speed communication types, be sure to set other than "0" to the node
ID No. . If "0" is set, high speed communication is not conducted.
And if plural high speed communication types are connected at TB2, set node ID No.
from 1 in order and do not duplicate node ID No. .
２）Jumper
This sets a terminating resistor for high speed communication.
① When this unit is a terminating unit, set it ON (1-2 jumper).
② When this unit is not a terminating unit, set it OFF (2-3 jumper).
３）Setting and connecting sample of ID, jumper, and TB2
The below is sample in case that 5 units are connected by digital chain
in high speed communication.
For Sequence control + high speed For high speed communication type
communication type
ID=0 ID=1 ID=2 ID=3 ID=4
Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper
1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2
TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2 TB2
１ １ １ １ １
２ ２ ２ ２ ２
３ ３ ３ ３ ３
４ ４ ４ ４ ４
５ ５ ５ ５ ５
６ ６ ６ ６ ６

［Tab.５−１０］ Connector TB2 terminal location

− 5-35 −
 ５−４ Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ ｍｏｄｅ
５−４−１ Control mode selection
In this unit, modes are divided into 3 levels which are ［Control mode level］,
［Run mode level］, and［Operation / Display mode level］. And ［Control mode level］
described in this phrase shall be selected / set first in order to run this unit.
As for mode configuration , please refer to the separate manual 「Volume: Dedicated functio
n」.
And mode selection of Control mode level is conducted by inputting the external input
signal, Remote / Local selection (PC).

Local mode
Local mode selects individual Run mode level, starts / stops individual motion basically by
control input signals.

Remote mode
Remote mode selects individual Run mode level, starts / stops individual motion basically by
Serial communication or sequence control.
As for communication method, please refer to the separate manual「Volume : Communication
protocol」.

− 5-36 −
５−５ Ｒｕｎ ｍｏｄｅ
５−５−１ Manual run mode
In Manual run mode, when Forward Jog signal (FJ) or Reverse jog signal (RJ) is ON for more
than 10ms, one shot Jog is conducted forward or reverse.
And when the ON status continues for more than 100ms, Jog motion is conducted forward or
reverse.
One shot Jog is the movement of minimum setting unit (one shot motion).
The value of parameter［P400］or parameter［P401］is selected for Jog motion speed
by Jog speed change signal (JOSP).

１）Operation procedure

Manual run

Select control mode by cont-

rol signal (Remote / Local).

Set associated
parameters.

By Reset ON signal
parameters are alive.

Servo ON signal ON

OFF
Servo ready signal ON？ no
Error, alarm occurred？
ON
Select Manual run by yes
mode select.signal 1,2. Servo ON signal OFF

Reverse Check, fix, and reset

Jog direction select. Error or Alarm.

Forward
Forward jog sig. ON Reverse jog sig. ON

Forward 1 shot jog ON Reverse 1 shot jog ON

no Forward jog signal Reverse jog signal no

100ms or more ON 100ms or more ON

yes yes

Forward jog action Reverse jog action

Forward jog sig.OFF Reverse jog sig.OFF

Motor stops.

［Fig.５−２］ Manual run operation procedure

− 5-37 −
 ２）Time chart

Servo ON signal
15ms or less

Servo ready signal

Remote / Local
change signal Control mode selection = Local mode

Mode select. 1, 2 signal Run mode selection = Manual run

Forward jog signal

20ms or more
（By [P706] setting）
Reverse jog signal
ｔ１
100ms ｔ１ 100ms 100ms

Forward speed ｔ１ ｔ１ ｔ１ ｔ１

Motor motion
(Internal speed command)
ｔ１＝ 15 ms or less
Reverse speed

Caution : When Forward jog signal（FJ）and Reverse jog signal（RJ）are

simultaneously inputted, a motor conducts decel. stop. After both signals
are once OFF, Forward / reverse jog signals are again inputted, One shot jog
is conducted, again. One shot travel amount is fixed minimum setting unit.

［Fig.５−３］ Manual run time chart

− 5-38 −
５−５−２ Zero return run mode
In Zero return run mode, Zero return is conducted by the speed command set by the parameter
［P404: Zero return speed］and［P405: Zero return creep speed］.
By 10ms or longer Forward signal (FJ), Forward zero return is conducted.
By 1oms or longer Reverse jog signal (RJ), Reverse zero return is conducted.
Zero return methods are next types.
Zero return Ｐ４０２
method setting Motion detail
Standard Zero return by Zero return decel. LS
Zero returnSTD.HOME Details can be referred to the time chart.
No LS Zero re. by marker or ZLS w/o Z.ret.decel.
Zero return LS LESS Details can be referred to the time chart.
On the spot Z.RSTOP HOME No motion and current posi. is zero point
OT back Reverse action when OT is passed in Zero
return.
Zero return OT HOME Details can be referred to the time chart.
※ parameter［P402: Zero return method selection］
［Tab.５−１２］ Zero return mode set and motion
１） Operation procedure

Zero ret. run

Select control mode by cont-

rol signal (Remote / Local).

Set associated
parameters.

By Reset ON signal
parameters are alive.

Servo ON signal ON

OFF
Servo ready signal ON？

ON
Select Zero return run
by Mode select.1, 2

Reverse(−) no
Zero return direc. select. Error, alarm occurred？

Forward(＋) yes
Forward jog sig.ON Reverse jog sig.ON Servo ON signal OFF

Forwa.Zero ret. action Rever.Zero ret. action Check, fix, and reset
Error or Alarm

no no
Positioning complete Positioning complete
signal ON ? signal ON ?
yes yes

［Fig.５−４］ Zero return run operation procedure

− 5-39 −
 ２） Time chart

Caution 1 : If Zero return decel.limit signal has been already ON when Zero return starts,
a motor once moves reverse against start command direction, and then after the
signal is turned OFF, starts Zero return to right direction.
Caution 2 : If hold signal is inputted in Zero return, a motor stops. And it starts to
opposite direction to Zero return if Zero return decel.limit signal is ON at
re-start, and starts to right Zero return direction after Zero return
decel.limit signal is turned O
Caution 3 : Marker signal selects whether Encoder marker signal shall be used or not
by the parameter.
Caution 4 : In Zero return, Software limit is not detected.
Caution 5 : Speed override does not wirk on Zero return creep speed.
Caution 6 : When Zero return is stopped incompletely, preset Forward / Reverse software
switches are still effective.

（ａ）【Standard Zero return】（Encoder marker is used.）

《At the start of Zero return, when Zero return decel.limit is OFF.》

［Fig.５−５］Standard Zero return run time chart１（Encoder marker is used.）

− 5-40 −
（ｂ）【Standard Zero return】（Encoder marker is not used）
《At the start of Zero return, when Zero return decel.limit is OFF.》

［Fig.５−６］Standard Zero return run time chart 2（Encoder marker is not used.）

（ｃ）【Standard Zero return】

《At the start of Zero return, when Zero return decel.limit is ON.》

［Fig.５−７］ Standard Zero return run time chart 3

− 5-41 −
５−５−３ Auto. run mode
By the parameter［P409: Auto. run permit condition selection］, Auto. run can be
disabled before Zero return is completed.
Auto. run executes commands continuously by internal stored commands or external setting
data. By turning Auto. start signal (PST) ON, a command of address sets is executed.

１）Operation procedure

Auto. run

Select control mode by cont-

rol signal (Remote / Local).

Set associated
parameters.

By Reset signal ON,

parameters are alive.

Servo ON signal ON

OFF
Servo ready signal ON？
no
ON Error, Alarm occurred？
Select Auto. run by
Mode select.signal 1,2. yes
Servo ON signal OFF
Set Address set
Check, fix, and reset
Auto. start signal ON Error or Alarm.

Executes commands in
turns. （In Auto. run）

OFF
Program end signal
ON？
ON

［Fig.５−１２］Auto. run operation procedure

− 5-45 −
 ２） Time chart

Servo ON signal
15ms or less
Servo ready signal
Remote / Local
change signal Control mode selection = Local mode

Mode selection 1,2 signal Run mode selection = Auto. run

Address set signal Address set 1 setting

10ms or less
Auto. start signal
20msb or more (by「P706] setting)
10ms or more
Hold signal
［P703:Rough matching ］ 15ms or less
range Set value Address 3
Forward speed 15ms or command
Address 1 less
Motor motion command
(Internal speed command) 15ms or
less Address 2
Reverse speed command

Rough matching signal

Positioning complete signal

Auto. run ready

Program end

［P202: Positioning complete range］setting value

［Fig. ５−１３］ Auto. run time chart

Caution 1 : When Hold stop was executed in Auto. run or Zero return, Run mode can be
changed during in Hold status. When Speed override signal is inputted, actual speed
becomes the speed, Speed command × Override ratio.

− 5-46 −
５−５−４ Pulse train run mode
In Pulse train mode, Pulse train run is executed in accordance with Pulse train command
(Line driver or Open collector method) or Pulse train communication.
１）Operation procedure

Pulse train run

Select control mode by cont-

rol signal (Remote / Local).

Set associated
parameters.

By Reset signal ON,

parameters are alive.

Servo ON signal ON

OFF
Servo ready signal ON？
no
ON Error, Alarm occurred？
Select Pulse train by
Mode select.signal 1,2 yes
Servo ON signal OFF
Pulse train command input
inhibit signal OFF
Check, fix, and reset
Error or Alarm.
In Pulse train run

［Fig.５−１４］Pulse train run operation procedure

２） Time chart

［Fig.５−１５］Pulse train run time chart

Caution 1: Travel amount to a pulse command after 1 command pulse input（[P603: Pulse train
command compensation numerator ]/[P604: Pulse train command compensation denominator] is
minimum setting unit. Output signal condition of 「 Positioning complete signal」is
determined by the parameter [P202: Positioning complete range] setting and deviation amount
at the time. In a special case,「Positioning complete signal」becomes ON during a motor is
running if large value is set to [P202].

− 5-47 −
 ５−６ Ａｎａｌｏｇ ｍｏｎｉｔｏｒ
At the analog monitor connector (P1) terminals MON1, and MON 2, contents selected by the
parameters［P700: Monitor 1 selection］and［P701: monitor 2 selection］is outputted by volta
ge.
Motor motion status (transit, steady state) can be confirmed by an oscilloscope.
Monitor item contents are as follows.
Code Monitor item Monitor contents
ＭＯＮ１ Speed command Outputs speed command value.
and ［SPD.REF.］ Polarity：Forward rotation;+, Reverse rotation;- voltage
ＭＯＮ２ Range：0∼±10V ±10％
At rated speed：Full range
Speed Outputs motor actual speed.
Feedback Polarity：Forward rotation; +, Reverse rotation; - volt.
［SPD.FB.］ Range：0∼±10V ±10％
125% of rated speed ：Full range (at rated speed: ±8V)
Torque command Outputs output torque value.
［TRQ.REF.］ Polarity：Forward torque drive ; + voltage
Reverse torque drive ; - voltage
Range：0∼±10V ±10％
At rated torque drive：±３．３Ｖ
External + Outputs +/- Torque limit value.
Torque limit
［TRQ.LIM.+］ Polarity：Forward and Reverse torque limit; Both + volt.
External - Range：0∼＋10V ±10％
Torque limit
［TRQ.LIM.-］ At rated torque limit：＋３．３Ｖ
Position Outputs Position deviation amount.
deviation 1
［P.RANGE.L］ Polarity : At + deviation; +, deviation; - voltage
Position Range：0∼±10V ±10％
deviation 2
［P.RANGE.H］ Deviation amount 1：At 255 pulses (4 times); full range
Deviation amount 2：At 4080 pulses (4 times); full range
ＮＣ speed Outputs Speed command value in Positioning or Pulse
command train run.
［SPD.OUT］ Polarity：Forward command; + , Reverse command ; - volt.
Range：0∼±10V ±10％
At rated speed：Full range
ＮＣ target Outputs Target speed computed internally in Positioning
speed , Jog or Zero return run.
［SCL.OUT］
Polarity：Forward command; + , Reverse command ; - volt.
Range：0∼±10V ±10％
At rated speed：Full range
Index data 62 Outputs in accordance with the data in Index data 62.
［IX62］ Polarity : Positive data ; +, Negative data ; - voltage
Range：0∼±10V ±10％
At 499：Full range
Index data 63 Outputs in accordance with the data in Index data 63.
［IX63］ Polarity : Positive data ; +, Negative data ; - voltage
Range：0∼±10V ±10％
At 499：Full range
Reserved For our adjustment
［OPT.W］ Never set this.
Reserved For our adjustment
［OPT.L］ Never set this.

［Tab.５−１３］Analog monitor contents

Caution 1 : Since Analog monitor resolution is 1000 within ±10V, transit wave could be
like steps. And ripple is generated by ratio 1/ 1000 (1000 resolution case) on the output.

− 5-48 −
Chapter ６ RUN

６−１ Inspection before start

After installation and wiring, conduct following inspection before start.
① Is there any mis-wiring ? Specially is the power not connected to motor connection
terminals U, V, W ?
② Is there no place in short-circuit status by cable chips, etc. ?
③ Is there no part of cable where abnormal force is added on ?
④ Is not there any loose fit screw, terminal, etc. ?
⑤ Is the power source correct ?
⑥ Is not there any short-circuit or line-to-ground fault in the external sequence
circuit ?
⑦ Is grounding method correct ? Is the earth ground grade JIS Class 3 or better ?

Caution
Never conduct insulation test as withstand voltage, megger test, etc. and noise test
by a simulator, etc. to this unit.
『Those test may damage the unit.』

６−２ Run procedure

Please operate this unit in accordance with the next procedure.
Be sure to conduct Trial run. In order to avoid a trouble, at first run the unit
without any load, and after confirming no fault, connect the unit to your machine.
And pay your special attention not to cause an accident.

Caution
① Do not touch terminals of the controller, carelessly.
『Since there is high voltage, it is very dangerous.』
② Do not use the unit without the terminal box cover.
『It may cause electric shock.』
③ Since some residual voltage is left after power is turned OFF, do no touch
terminals and main circuits for 2 to 3 minutes. (For NCS-FI/FS＊＊M-401,402,
confirm the front panel LED display 「CHARGE」is lit OFF.）
④ Power ON/OFF shall be conducted after confirming safety, cautiously.

６−２−１ Confirmation of power source

Please confirm the power source for the controller satisfies the required
specification. Power source specification can be referred to [10-1 Specification
of controller].

６−２−２ Trial run

１）Separation of a motor and load
① Remove the motor connection from the machine system and make no load status.
２）Servo ON signal（SON(*)）OFF
① Before turning power ON, turn OFF Servo ON signal（SON(*)）.
３）Power ON
① When power is turned ON, initial status is displayed in the LCD module.

− 6-1 −
４）Parameter set
① Set［P000: Motoe type］and other parameters and Positioning data to meet with your
application.（Refer to the separate manual 「Volume: Dedicated function」.）
＊ Required parameters for Trial run are as follows.

Paramet. No. Name Reference

Ｐ０００ Motor type
Ｐ００１ Encoder type selection
Ｐ００２ Encoder pulse selection
Ｐ００５ ABS encoder resolution selection Only for ABS encoder

［Tab.６−１］ Required parameters for Trial run

② In Trial run, select『Local mode』by the control input signal Remote/ Local change (PC).
５）Power re-input
① In order to reflect parameter values on actual motion, re-input the power.

６）Confirmation of control input signal

① Turn ON/OFF all the control inputs except Servo ON（SON(*)）signal, and by ON/OFF
status of individual input display in the front panel LCD module (I/O signal display
section), confirm if connection and logic of control inputs are correct.
② As for Speed override signals (OR1∼OR4) and Address set signals (SS1∼SS3,PS4∼PS8)
confirm them by Diagnosis display mode.
７）Servo ON signal（SON(*)）ON
① After setting parameters, and confirming control input signals, turn OFF Over
travel signals（FOT*，ROT*）, Emergency stop signal（EMG*）, turn On and then OFF Reset
signal（RST）. (LCD module［FOT］,［ROT］and［EMG］OFF）
Then turn ON Servo ON signal（SON(*)）. At the time all other control signals shall be OFF.
② When Servo ON signal（SON(*)）is ON, a motor is ready to generate driving torque and
resisting torque to external force.
③ If Alarm is displayed or a motor runs at the time when Servo ON signal（SON(*)）is ON,
investigate and delete the cause.
８）Run mode selection
① Select Run mode by Mode selection signal 1, 2 (MD1,MD2).
９）Run motion check
① Run a motor by low speed command (as Jog motion, etc.), and confirm if speed is
correct, abnormal vibration does not occur, abnormal sound does not exist, etc. .
② Change command speed and confirm that motor speed is proportional changed to the command.
(It is recommended to measure the speed with a tachometer on the motor load shaft.)
③ If in the item ② , motor speed can not be increased or not proportional to the
speed command and motor vibration or abnormal sound occurs, investigate and delete the cause.
④ In case of Positioning run, confirm if the motor rotating amount is correct to
Positioning data. (It is recommended to mark on the motor load shaft to confirm position.)
⑤ If in the item ④, the motor rotating amount is multiplied by constant ratio or
fluctuates, investigate and delete the cause.
⑥ Running motion confirmation shall be conducted for both forward and reverse directions.

− 6-2 −
 10）Load run
① After Trial run in no load is over, connect the motor to the machine and
conduct Trial run, again.
② Before executing load run, confirm that Emergency stop, Over travel, etc. , surely
works.
③ Please inspect if abnormal sound, abnormal vibration, or abnormal heat, etc. , does not
occur.
④ If above abnormality occurs, or Alarm is displayed, investigate and delete the cause.
⑤ Motor motion and load status can be confirmed by LCD module (Status and Diagnosis display
mode). (Refer to the separate manual 「Volume: Dedicated function」,「2-2 Display mode」.
⑥ If machine system travel amount and NC position command is not equal, confirm the
next parameters.
＊ Required parameters for matching NC positioning command with machine system motion.

Paramet. No. Name Reference

Ｐ３０１ Setting unit selection
Ｐ３０２ Command unit
Ｐ３０３ Electric gear numerator ＊ By this parameter, actual
machine system travel amount
Ｐ３０４ Electric gear denominator and NC position command is
matched.
Ｐ３１０ Machine travel amount

［Tab.６−２］Required parameters for position matching

Caution: Load inertia ratio to the motor inertia shall be within the standard
range. Applied GD２ value can be referred to the specification.

６−３ Adjustment
６−３−１ Adjustment status at shipment
All the controller adjustment is set by parameters.
Standard adjustment (initial value) at our factory shipment can be referred to the
separate manual「Volume: Dedicated function」.
Though a controller has standard adjustment values (initial value set) at our factory
shipment, it may be necessary to readjust the controller when a machine system is
connected to actual load condition and application.

※１ Auto. tuning can be conducted by Auto. tuning function.

As for Auto. tuning function, refer to「7-4 Auto. tuning」.

※２ In some case, due to actual load status, mechanical play, etc. , Auto. tuning could not
be conducted. In the case, referring to the following description, set individual
parameter, manually.

− 6-3 −
 ６−３−２ Adjustment point for individual phenomenon (parameter)
Phenomenon Adjustment point (parameter)
［P105:Speed loop gain /Low speed gain range］
［P106:Speed loop integral time con. /
A motor vibrates in stop status. L spd. gain range］
［P107:Speed loop derivative time con./
L spd. gain range］
［P108:Torque command filter freq. /
L spd. gain range］
Effective in L spd. gain range by P100 set.
［P201:Servo lock gain］
Effective in Posi.complete range
by P202 set.
［P101: Speed loop gain］
［P102: Speed loop integral time const.］
A motor vibrates in running. ［P103: Speed loop derivative time const.］
［P104: Torque command filter freq.］
［P200: Position loop gain］
［P205: Feed forward ratio］
［P605: Pulse train feed forward ratio］
［P116: Speed loop gain / GSEL signal ON］
A motor vibrates when GSEL signal is ［P117: Speed loop integral time cons. /
ON. GSEL signal ON］
［P118: Speed loop derivative time cons. /
GSEL signal ON］
［P119: Torq. cmmnd. filter freq./
GSEL signal ON］
［P210: Add. time to S shape Accel./Decel.］
Over-shoot and under0shoot is large ［P101: Speed loop gain］
at motor start and stop. ［P102: Speed loop integral time const.］
［P103: Speed loop derivative time const.］
［P200: Position loop gain］
［P205: Feed forward ratio］
［P605: Pulse train feed forward ratio］
Over-speed fault occurs. ［P211∼P213: Accel. time 1∼3］
［P214∼P216: Decel. time 1∼3］
［P200: Position loop gain］
［P207: Over-flow detection pulse］
Deviation over-flow occurs. ［P205: Feed forward ratio］
［P605: Pulse train feed forward ratio］
［P211∼P213: Accel. time 1∼3］
［P214∼P216: Decel. time 1∼3］
［P200: Position loop gain］
Positioning time is long. ［P202: Positioning complete range］
［P205: Feed forward ratio］
［P605: Pulse train feed forward ratio］
※ Individual parameter description and setting method can be referred to the separate manual
「Volume: Dedicated function」.
［Tab.６−３］Adjustment point of individual phenomenon (parameter)

− 6-4 −
６−３−３ Individual adjustment method
１）《Speed loop gain》
① Speed loop gain［P101］/ Low speed gain range［P105］/ GSEL signal ON［P116］
・ The larger, the setting value is, the quicker the response is.
・ Too large set causes vibration.
・ Too low set makes response slow and motion unstable.
② Speed loop integral time constant［P102］/ Low speed gain range［P106］/ GSEL
signal ON［P117］
・ The smaller, the setting value is, the quicker the response is.
・ Too small set causes vibration.
・ Too high set makes response slow and motion unstable.
③ Speed loop derivative time constant［P103］/ Low speed gain range［P107］/ GSEL
signal ON［P118］
・ When this is set, response becomes quick.
・ The smaller, the setting value is, the earlier time it works in motion
characteristics. Too large set works all the motion range and causes
vibration.
２）《Torque command filter》（Normally initial value is not changed.）
① Torque command filter freq.［P104］/ Low speed gain range［P108］/ GSEL signal ON［P119］
・ If machine resonance occurs, insert a filter to Torque command to fix it.
・ The larger, the setting value is, the quicker the response is.
・ Too low set makes response slow and motion unstable.
３）《Position loop gain》
① Position loop gain［P200］
・ The larger, the setting value is, the quicker the response is.
・ Too large set causes Over-shoot, Under-shoot and vibration.
・ Too low set makes Positioning time longer and Positioning accuracy worse.
② Servo lock gain［P201］
・ The larger, the setting value is, the quicker the response is in Servo lock.
・ Too large set causes vibration.
・ Too low set makes Servo lock weaker and shifts stop position by external force.
４）《Feed forward ratio》
① Feed forward ratio［P205］
・ The larger, the setting value is, the higher , the compliance is to a command.
・ Too large set causes over-shoot, under-shoot and vibration.
・ Too low set makes Positioning time longer.
② Pulse train feed forward ratio［P605］
・ The larger, the setting value is, the higher , the compliance is to Pulse train
command.
・ Too large set causes over-shoot, under-shoot and vibration.
・ Too low set makes Positioning time longer.

− 6-5 −
 ５）【 Gain adjustment method 】
Gain can be adjusted by using Analog monitor (connector P1) and observing the wave of Speed
feedback in an oscilloscope.
Adjust Position loop and Speed loop gain parameters until over-shoot, under-shoot and
vibration does not occur.
● Conduct below adjustment in running status
① Set a little bit low value to［P200: Position loop1 gain］and［P201: Servo lock gain］and
adjust ［P101: Speed loop gain］as high as possible unless a motor vibrates.
② Adjust and set the optimum value to［P102: Speed loop integral time const.］and re-adjust
［P101: Speed loop gain］, again to find motor optimum motion.
③ Set［P103: Speed loop derivative time const.］to decrease over-shoot and under-shoot
further more. Large value set causes vibration.
④ When machine resonance occurs, adjust［P104: Torque command filter］as high as possible
to avoid the resonance.
⑤ Adjust and set［P200: Position loop gain］as high as possible within the range where
motor vibration, over-shoot and under-shoot does not occur.
● Conduct below adjustment in stop status
① Copy parameter settings in above running status to the parameters in stop status.
P201 ← P200［Position loop gain］
P105 ← P101［Speed loop gain］
P106 ← P102［Speed loop integral time const.］
P107 ← P103［Speed loop derivative time const.］
② If a motor vibrates after setting the above, adjust next parameters as the
adjustment methods in running status.
［P201: Servo lock gain］,
［P105: Speed loop gain/ Low speed gain range］
［P106: Speed loop integral time const. / Low speed gain range］
［P107: Speed loop derivative time const. / Low speed gain range］
③ When machine resonance occurs, adjust［P104: Torque command filter］as high as possible
to avoid the resonance.

● Conduct below adjustment in GSEL signal ON status.

（Adjustment is not required when Speed gain selection signal (GSEL signal) is not used.)
① Adjust and set［P116: Speed loop gain / GSEL signal ON］as high as possible within the
range where a motor does not vibrate.
② Adjust and set the optimum value to［P117: Speed loop integral time const. /
GSEL signal ON］and re-adjust［P116 : Speed loop gain / GSEL signal ON］］,
again to find motor optimum motion.
③ Set［P119: Speed loop derivative time const. / GSEL signal ON］to reduce over-shoot and
under-shoot further more. Large value set causes vibration.
④ When machine resonance occurs, adjust［P118: Torque command filter / GSEL signal ON］］
as high as possible to avoid the resonance.

※ Please refer to the separate manual 「Volume: Dedicated function」,「2-3-2 Real time gain set」.

− 6-6 −
Chapter 7 Self-diagnosis and forced jog mode

７−１ Self-diagnostic mode execution procedure

This unit is equipped with Self-diagnostic function to check external I/O and internal
circuits.
Self-diagnostic mode can be selected by key input of LCD module.
Self-diagnostic mode execution procedure is as below.

Set "1103" to ITEM No. and push .

ＩＴＥＭ

１１０３

Diagnosis No. and title which shows contents

ＤＧ００ are displayed in LCD module. Push or
to select Self-diagnostic item.
Ｉ／Ｏ ＩＮ１
Title to show diagnosis contents are

in Diagnosis No. column [] of [7-3 Self-

diagnostic item description].

Push .

Executes selected Self-diagnosis.

Shall executing Self-diagnostic Ｎｏ

item be terminated
？
Ｙｅｓ

Shall Self-diagnostic mode Ｎｏ Push to finish executing

be terminated Self-diagnostic item.
？
Ｙｅｓ

Push to finish Self-diagnostic mode.

Input Reset signal(RST) to return

to normal operation condition.

［Fig.７−１］ Self-diagnostic mode executing procedure

− 7-1 −
７−２ Self−diagnosis

Diag.No. Diagnostic item Diagnostic contents

ＤＧ００ Control input signal Control input signal status is displayed in LCD
ＤＧ０１ Check１ module.
ＤＧ０２ Pulse train command Internal command counter status (command value) by
counter Check Pulse train command input is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ０３ Feedback pulse Internal feedback pulse counter status (feedback pulse
position counter counter value) by Encoder feedback pulse is displayed
Check in LCD module.
ＤＧ０４ Feedback pulse speed Internal speed detecting counter (encoder feedback
detection counter pulse frequency) by Encoder feedback pulse is
Check displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ０５ Speed command input Input voltage of External speed command (analog
voltage Check voltage) is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ０６ Torque command input Input voltage of External torque command (analog
voltage Check voltage) is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ０７ Torque limit+command Input voltage of External torque limit + command
input voltage Check (analog voltage) is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ０８ Torque limit-command Input voltage of External torque limit - command
input voltage Check (analog voltage) is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ０９ Analog monitor OV is outputted to Analog monitor terminal（ＭＯＮ１，
０Ｖ output Check ＭＯＮ２）.
ＤＧ１０ Analog monitor +10v is outputted to Analog monitor terminal（ＭＯＮ
＋10Ｖ output Check １，ＭＯＮ２）.
ＤＧ１１ Analog monitor -10V is outputted to Analog monitor terminal（ＭＯＮ
−10Ｖ output Check １，ＭＯＮ２）.
ＤＧ１２ Analog monitor +5V is outputted to Analog monitor terminal（ＭＯＮ
＋５Ｖ output Check １，ＭＯＮ２）.
ＤＧ１３ Analog monitor -5V is outputted to Analog monitor terminal（ＭＯＮ
−５Ｖ output Check １，ＭＯＮ２）.
ＤＧ１４ Control input signal Control input status of connector J5 is displayed in
Check２ LCD module.
DG１５∼ Individual signal This item is for adjustment at our factory shipment.
DG１８ Check
DG１9∼ ＢＣＤ data input Read value of BCD data input of connector J5 is
DG２２ signal Check displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ３０ Thermistor input This item is for adjustment at our factory shipment.
Check
ＤＧ５０ ＲＡＭ Check Confirms if internal RAM is normal by executing READ /
WRITE. Results are displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ５１ Control output Outputs control output signal of connector CN1 in
signal Check １ turns. Output status is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ５２ Serial communication Short-circuits TXD(A)−RXD(A),TXD(B)−RXD(B), and RXD
I/F Check (A)−RLR(A) of connector J1 to confirm if Transmission
/ Receipt is properly conducted.
Results are displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ５３ Control output Outputs control output signal of connector J5 in
signal Check ２ turns. Output status is displayed in LCD module.
ＤＧ５５ Display unit output This item is for adjustment at our factory shipment.
Check
ＤＧ５６ ＥＥＰＲＯＭ Check Confirms if internal EEPROM (non-volatile memory) is
normal by executing READ /WRITE.
Results are displayed in LCD module.

［Tab.７−１（ａ）］ Self-diagnostic item (1/2)

− 7-2 −
Diag.No. Diagnostic item Diagnostic contents
ＤＧ５７ Pulse train Conducts Transmission data check by Pulse train
communication communication through connector J2.
transmission Check This and DG 58 is a pair for the check.
ＤＧ５８ Pulse train Conducts Receipt data check by Pulse train
communication communication through connector J2.
receipt Check This and DG 57 is a pair for the check.
ＤＧ９０ Test run This item is for adjustment at our factory shipment.
Never execute this.
DG９１∼ ＤＣＣＴ offset This item was adjusted at our factory shipment.
DG９５ adjustment Never change the setting.
ＤＧ９７ Auto. tuning Automatically sets Speed loop gain when GSEL signal is
at GSEL signal ON ON.
ＤＧ９８ Auto. tuning Automatically sets Speed loop gain when GSEL signal is
OFF.

［Tab.７−１(b)］ Self-diagnostic item (2/2)

Caution
① Self-diagnostic items DG90 ∼ 95 are for adjustment at our factory shipment.
Never execute them.

− 7-3 −
７−３ Self-diagnostic item description

Diagnosis No. Actual LCD display Diagnostic contents

Control input signal check１ When Control input signal of connector CN1 is ON,
input signal name is lit in signal display section
ＤＧ００ ＤＧ００ of LCD module.
[__I/O_IN1] ■■■■■■■■ When Diagnosis No.is DG00, individual signal of
[PS8]∼[PS4],[SS3]∼[SS1] is displayed by bit in
PS8 PS6 PS4 SS2 data display section.
PS7 PS5 SS3 SS1 When Diagnosis No.is DG01,individual signal of [OR4]
∼[OR1] is displayed by bit in data display section.
ＤＧ０１ ＤＧ０１ Each bit display is ｢1｣ when the signal is ON,
[__I/O_IN2] ■■■■ and ｢0｣ when OFF.
ON and OFF rule can be referred to［5-2-3 Input
OR4 OR2 and output interface ］.
OR3 OR1

Pulse train comma counter check Displays internal counter value of Pulse train
command. When 90゜different phase is inputted, 4
ＤＧ０２ ＤＧ０２ times value of the pulse is displayed. Display
[_PLS.REF.] ■■■■■ range: 0∼65535 (increases for forward command.)

Feedback pulse position counter Displays internal position counter value of Encoder
check feedback pulse.
4 times value of the input pulse is displayed.
ＤＧ０３ ＤＧ０３ Display range : 0∼65535 (increases for forward
[__ENC.FB.] ■■■■■ command.)

Feedback pulse speed detection Displays internal speed detection counter value of
counter check Encoder feedback pulse. 4 times value of the input
pulse is displayed. In ｢★｣ of the left figure,
ＤＧ０４ ＤＧ０４★ code (in reverse ｢−｣) is displayed.
[SPD.COUNT] ■■■■■■

Speed command input voltage check Displays input voltage of External speed command.
In ｢★｣ of the left figure, code (in negative
ＤＧ０５ ＤＧ０５★ voltage ｢−｣) is displayed.
[_SPD.REF.] ■■．■■

Torque command input voltage check Displays input voltage of External torque command.
In ｢★｣ of the left figure, code (in negative
ＤＧ０６ ＤＧ０６★ voltage ｢−｣) is displayed.
[_TRQ.REF.] ■■．■■

Torq.limit +cmmnd.input volt.check Displays input voltage of External torque limit +

command voltage.
ＤＧ０７ ＤＧ０７★ In ｢★｣ of the left figure, code (in negative
[_TRQ.LIM+] ■■．■■ voltage ｢−｣) is displayed.

Torq.limit -cmmnd.input volt.check Displays input voltage of External torque limit -+

command voltage.
ＤＧ０８ ＤＧ０８★ In ｢★｣ of the left figure, code (in negative
[_TRQ.LIM-] ■■．■■ voltage ｢−｣) is displayed.

− 7-4 −
Diagnosis No. Actual LCD display Diagnostic contents

Analog monitor OV output check Outputs 0[V] to Analog monitor output terminals
（MON1，MON2）.
ＤＧ０９ ＤＧ０９
[_A.MON.0V] ０．００

Analog monitor +10V output check Outputs +10[V] to Analog monitor output terminals
（MON1，MON2）.
ＤＧ１０ ＤＧ１０
[A.MON+10V] １０．００

Analog monitor -10V output check Outputs -10[V] to Analog monitor output terminals
（MON1，MON2）.
ＤＧ１１ ＤＧ１１−
[A.MON-10V] １０．００

Analog monitor +5V output check Outputs +5[V] to Analog monitor output terminals
（MON1，MON2）.
ＤＧ１２ ＤＧ１２
[A.MON.+5V] ５．００

Analog monitor -5V output check Outputs -5[V] to Analog monitor output terminals
（MON1，MON2）.
ＤＧ１３ ＤＧ１３−
[A.MON.-5V] ５．００

Control input signal check ２ Displays Control input signal status of connecter J
5. M complete signal（MFIN）is corresponding to 2１
ＤＧ１４ ＤＧ１４ bit of 10０ bit position.When the signal changes from
[___EXT.IN] ０００００００２ OFF to ON, 2 is added to value of 10０ bit position.

− 7-5 −
Diagnosis No. Actual LCD display Diagnostic contents

Individual signal check This item is for adjustment at our factory shipment.

ＤＧ１５ ＤＧ１５ ∼１８

∼ＤＧ１８ ■■■■■■■■■
[*********]

ＢＣＤ data input signal check

ＤＧ１９ ＤＧ１９★ Displays read BCD data value[BCD 8 digit (collective

[__DIG.SW5] ■■■■■■■■ input)] inputted to connector J5.

ＤＧ２０ ＤＧ２０★ Displays read setting data value of Digital switch

[__DIG.SW6] ■■■■■■■■ unit SWU-501B (first line) or SWU-501C connected to
connector J5.

ＤＧ２１ ＤＧ２１★ Displays read setting data value of Digital switch

[__DIG.SW7] ■■■■■■■■ SWU-501B (second line) connected to connector J5.

ＤＧ２２ ＤＧ２２★ Displays read setting data value of Digital switch

[__DIG.SW8] ■■■■■■■■ SWU-501B (third line) connected to connector J5.

Caution 1: DG19∼DG22 display of types which have no J5 connector is ｢- FFFFFFFF｣.

Caution 2: DG19 display becomes setting data when parameter［P714］is「DIG BCD」, and
｢- FFFFFFFF｣ when the parameter is「DIG COM」.
Caution 3: DG20∼22 display becomes setting data when parameter［P714］is「DIG COM」,
and ｢- FFFFFFFF｣ when the parameter is「DIG BCD」.
And it becomes ｢00000000｣ when Digital switch unit is not connected.
Caution 4: When read setting data value of DG19∼DG22 is displayed by letters「A∼F」,
it indicates setting value error, wrong connection, etc. exists.

Thermistor input check This item is for adjustment at our factory shipment.

ＤＧ３０ ＤＧ３０
[ THERMIST] ■■■■■■■■■

− 7-6 −
Diagnosis No. Actual LCD display Diagnostic contents

ＲＡＭ check Checks internal RAM and displays Diagnostic results

as below tabulation.
ＤＧ５０ ＤＧ５０
[______RAM] ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ Display Results Error description
[_____OK!!] Normal
end
Extended
memory [_ERROR1!!] Err.N0.1 Data｢0000｣Read/Writ.err.
installed
[_ERROR2!!] Err.No.2 Data｢5555｣Read/Writ.err.
[_____*RAM]
[_ERROR3!!] Err.No.3 Data｢AAAA｣Read/Writ.err.
[_ERROR4!!] Err.No.4 Data｢FFFF｣Read/Writ.err.

Control output signal check１ Control output signal of connector J1 is ON in turns

every 1 second as below.（Alarm signal, Warning
ＤＧ５１ ＤＧ５１ signal output logic is set by［P715］.） During
[__I/O_OUT] ■■■ ＯＮ！！ output signal is ON, output signal name is lit in
signal display section of LCD module. And in ｢■■■｣
of left figure, output signal name is displayed.
Start
Alarm Warning Servo ready Speed zero
(ＡＬＭ) (ＷＮＧ) (ＲＤＹ) (ＳＺ)
In torque Brake rele- Rough mat- Positioning
limit(LIM) ase (BRK) ching(PRF) complete (PN)

Serial communication I/F check At normal end,「 ＯＫ！！」, and at

abnormal end,「 ＥＲＲＯＲ！！」is displayed.
ＤＧ５２ ＤＧ５２ Short-circuit TXD(A)-RXD(A), TXD(B)-RXD(B), and RXD
[__S.COMM.] ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ (A)-RLA(A) of connector J1. connection is as below.

Controller Ｊ１

ＴＸＤ（Ａ） ２
ＴＸＤ（Ａ） １
ＲＬＴ（Ｂ）１０
Ｊ１

ＴＸＤ（Ｂ） ８
ＴＸＤ（Ｂ） ９
ＲＸＤ（Ａ） ４
ＲＸＤ（Ａ） ５
ＲＬＲ（Ａ） ３
ＲＸＤ（Ｂ）１２
ＲＸＤ（Ｂ）１１
Ｃ５Ｖ ７
ＧＮＤ １４

ＦＧ

Control output signal check２ Control output signal of connector J5 is ON in turns

every 1 second as below. During output signal is ON,
ＤＧ５３ ＤＧ５３ output signal name is displayed in ｢■■■■｣ of
[__EXT.OUT] ■■■■ ＯＮ！ left figure.
Types which have no j5 connector display「NO I/F」.
Start
Gen.out.１ Gen.out.２ Gen.out.３ Gen.out.４ Gen.out.５
(ＯＵＴ１) (ＯＵＴ２) (ＯＵＴ３) (ＯＵＴ４) (ＯＵＴ５)
Soft.swit. B Soft.swit. A Gen.out.８ Gen.out.７ Gen.out.６
(ＳＬＳＢ) (ＳＬＳＡ) (ＯＵＴ８) (ＯＵＴ７) (ＯＵＴ６)

− 7-7 −
Diagnosis No. Actual LCD display Diagnostic contents

Display unit output check This item is for adjustment at our factory.
Never execute this.
ＤＧ５５ ＤＧ５５
[EXT.DISP.] ■■■■■■■■■

ＥＥＰＲＯＭ check Checks internal EEPROM and displays Diagnostic

results as below tabulation.
ＤＧ５６ ＤＧ５６
[__ EEPROM] ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ Display Results Error description
[_____OK!!] Normal
end
[_ERROR1!!] Err.N0.1 Data｢0000｣Read/Writ.err.
[_ERROR2!!] Err.No.2 Data｢5555｣Read/Writ.err.
[_ERROR3!!] Err.No.3 Data｢AAAA｣Read/Writ.err.
[_ERROR4!!] Err.No.4 Data｢FFFF｣Read/Writ.err.
[_ERROR5!!] Err.No.5 Retn. to original data err.

− 7-8 −
Diagnosis No. Actual LCD display Diagnostic contents

Pls.train commun.transmis. check Transmits data by Pulse train communication through

connector J2 in turns every 0.5 second as below.
ＤＧ５７ ＤＧ５７ And in ｢■■■■■｣ of left figure, Transmission
[_PLS.TRS.] ■■■■■ data No. is displayed.
Start 00000 11111 22222

55555 44444 33333

Pulse train commun. receipt check Receives data by Pulse train communication through
connector J2. For this check, connection of J2 to
ＤＧ５８ ＤＧ５８ NCS-FI/FS or other NPS-FI/FS which transmits by
[_PLS.RCV.] ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ DG57 is required. Received data are transmitted
data by DG57 from NCS-FI/FS or other NPS-FI/FS.
Diagnostic results of Received data are as follows.

Display Results Error description

[_____OK!!] Normal
end
[_SUM.ERROR] Abnormal Sum check error of
end communication data
[_TIME.OVER] Abnormal No communication data
end was received.

Test run This item is for adjustment at our factory.

Never execute this.
ＤＧ９０ ＤＧ９０ If it is executed, a motor runs and it is dangerous.
[TST.DRIVE] ■■■■■■■■■

ＤＣＣＴ offset adjustment This item is for adjustment at our factory.

DG91 ∼ DG95

Auto. tuning This item is the function to automatically measure

load characteristics (machine system) and set
ＤＧ９７ ＤＧ９７ adequate servo system parameters when GSEL signal
[_GSELTUNE] ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ is ON. Please refer to［7-4 Auto. tuning］for the
displayed in operation.
Test run.
ＤＧ９７
ＣＡＬＣＵＬＡＴＥ
displayed in
computing parameter

Auto. tuning This item is the function to automatically measure

load characteristics (machine system) and set
ＤＧ９８ ＤＧ９８ adequate servo system parameters. Please refer to
[_AUTOTUNE] ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ ［7-4 Auto. tuning］for the operation.
displayed in
Test run
ＤＧ９８
ＣＡＬＣＵＬＡＴＥ
displayed in
computing parameter

− 7-9 −
７−４ Auto．tuning
Auto. tuning is the function that the unit itself sets or supports setting of adequate
Servo control parameters for a machine (motor load). Auto. tuning consists of 2 functions,
「Auto.tuning function」 and「Tuning level adjustment function」.
Auto. tuning function sets adequate Servo control parameters in accordance with the machine
action when a motor is rotated in Trial run (internal run motion pattern).
Tuning level adjustment function supports setting of more adequate Servo control parameters
by increasing or decreasing gain in accordance with machine characteristics measured by
Auto. tuning function.
And this unit has Servo control parameter change function (selection by GSE) and to the
change command, Auto. tuning at 2 types of motor load status is assigned.

Caution
① Since in Auto. tuning function, a motor runs in accordance with the setting of
parameters [P113］and［p114］, please confirm that the load machine stays in the
movable range. If Over travel signal (FOT＊/ ROT＊) is not connected, this function
is error. However FOT＊and ROT＊ can be disabled by the parameter［P705］setting.
② In Auto. tuning function, input signals except FOT＊and ROT＊ are invalid.
Reset signal（RST）, Emergeny stop signal（EMG*）, etc. can not hold (or stop) the
tuning.
③ If abnormality occurs such as vibration, etc. in Auto. tuning function, stop the
tuning immediately by key. in the case, a motor goes into Torque free status
and moves by its inertia.
④ In the below cases, Auto. tuning function may not tune correct gain and oscillation
or runaway could happen. in the case, please set gain, manually.
(1) Big un-equal load
(2) Big friction
(3) Fluctuation of load inertia
(4) Low rigidity of a load machine
(5) Play or backlash in a load machine
(6) Load inertia is 3 times less of motor inertia.

Compulsion
① Auto. tuning function and Tuning level adjustment function computes optimum speed
loop gain based on measured load characteristics. If load changes due to fine
adjustment of the load machine, etc. after Auto. tuning function and Tuning level
adjustment function are over, be sure to again conduct Auto. tuning function by
measuring new load characteristics. If Auto. tuning function was not reaajusted
against load change, oscillation or runaway of the load machine may occur.

Prohibition
① Do not conduct Auto.tuning to the motor with a vertical shaft, etc. where external
torque is loaded. When Self-diagnosis is selected for conducting Auto. tuning
function, a motor becomes Torque free and is moved by external torque.

− 7-10 −
７−４−１ Auto. tuning execution procedure

Auto. tuning execution procedure is as follows.

Assemble this unit motor and load machine.

In Auto. tuning function, as input signal

Turn FOT*,ROT* input signals OFF. only FOT* and ROT* are valid. RST and EMG*,
can not hold (or stop).
(Parameters [P705] can disable FOT* and ROT*.)

Do not carelessly start Self-diagnostic

Self-diagnostic mode starts. function other than Auto. tuning function.

Auto. tuning function is executed. ※［7-4-2 Auto. tuning function］Reference

Self-diagnostic finished.

Input RST input signal.

Make Servo ON status

Tuning level adjustment mode starts.

Tuning level adjustment is conducted. ※［7-4-3 Tuning level adjustment fun］

Reference
Tuning level adjustment mode finished.

Tuning is completed.

［Fig.７−２］ Auto. tuning execution procedure

− 7-11 −
７−４−２ Auto. tuning function
Auto. tuning function is operated by Diagnosis No. DG97 and DG98 of Self-diagnostic mode.

● DG 98 measures machine characteristics in Trial run and sets adequate values to the
following Control servo parameter.
Therefore, be sure to connect a motor and load, and execute DG98.

No. Parameter name Reference

P101 Speed loop gain Sets adequate value.
P102 Speed loop integral time coast. Sets adequate value.
P103 Speed loop derivative time coast. Set 0.(Normally 0 is adequate.)
P105 Speed loop gain / Low speed gain range Same set value as P101
P106 Spd.lp.intg.time cons./L.spd.gain rng. Same set value as P102
P107 Spd.lp.deriv.time cons./L.spd.gain rng. Same set value as p103
P139 Speed loop Prop. gain division ratio Set 0.(Normally 0 is adequate.)
P140 Inertia Set adequate value.
P141 Viscosity friction Set adequate value.
P142 Speed loop FF2 compensation ratio Set 0.(Normally 0 is adequate.)

● DG97 sets following Servo control parameters when GSEL is ON.

Since machine characteristics are measured in Trial run, be sure to connect a motor
and load for GSEL signal ON, and execute DG97.

No. parameter name Reference

P116 Speed loop gain / at GSEL signal ON Set adequate value.
P117 Spd.lp.intg.time cons./ at GSEL sig.ON Set adequate value.
P118 Spd.lp.deriv.time cons./at GSEL sig.ON Set 0.(Normally 0 is adequate.)

And when machine load or other load characteristics are changed, Be sure to again measure
load characteristics by Auto. tuning function.
Auto. tuning function can set adequate gain when load inertia is in the range of 3 ∼ 30
times of motor inertia. If load inertia exceeds 30 times, since gain is set a little bit
low, please confirm safety and then re-adjust by Tuning level adjustment function.

− 7-12 −
１）Auto. tuning function execution procedure

Operation in Auto. tuning function is as follows. (D97 operation is same.)

Set and confirm
parameters [P113] and [p114].

By , select
ＤＧ９８ Diagnosis item
DG98.
ＡＵＴＯＴＵＮＥ

Push key.
Motor shaft rotates in ［Fig.７−４］
Auto. tuning Trial run. please again confirm that
ＤＧ９８ trial run is a load machine is in the movable range.
executed.
ＲＵＮＮＩＮＧ (Motor runs.) Stop by key.（The parameter is not changed.）

Stop by key.（Results display is stopped.

Motor stops, when tuning is properly finished, the parameter
ＤＧ９８ and optimum
gain to load will be changed.
ＣＡＬＣＵＬＡＴＥ characteristics Abnormal end
is computed.

Normal end

Optimum Error occurred.

ＤＧ９８ parameter was ＤＧ９８
set. Parameter is not
ＯＫ！！ ＥＲＲＯＲ１ changed.

Push key. ※［Tab.７−２ Error No.list］Reference

Auto. tuning is
ＤＧ９８ finished.

ＡＵＴＯＴＵＮＥ

Caution 1 : In Auto. tuning trial run, if a motor vibrates

Ｙｅｓ executes the tuning, again.
Do you repeat Auto. tuning
？
Ｎｏ

Push key to finish Self-diagnostic mode.

Input Reset signal (RST) to return to

normal operation condition.

［Fig.７−３］ Auto. tuning function execution procedure

− 7-13 −
２）Parameter setting
In order to execute Auto. tuning function, please set and confirm parameters［P113］and
［P114].

［Ｐ１１３］ Auto. tuning trial run direction selection

１． Function
This sets trial run direction of a motor in Auto. tuning function.
●ＢＯＴＨ： The motor rotates forward and then reverse direction.
●＋ＯＮＬＹ： The motor rotates only forward direction.
●−ＯＮＬＹ： The motor rotates only reverse direction.
Normally, select“ＢＯＴＨ”. Only when a load machine can move one direction either
forward or reverse, change this parameter.
And since the parameter［P300 Rotating direction selection］set can reverse rotating
direction, please note it.
２．Unit, setting range
(1) Unit ： Menu selection
(2) Setting range ：ＢＯＴＨ／＋ＯＮＬＹ／−ＯＮＬＹ
(3) Initial value ：ＢＯＴＨ
３．Display
【Auto. tuning trial run direction selection】
Auto. tuning trial run direction is displayed in turns.
Ｐ１１３ (BOTH/+ONLY/-ONLY)
Left sample Fig. shows both direction is selected.
ＢＯＴＨ

Motor motion pattern in Auto. tuning trial run is shown as follows.

ＢＯＴＨ

ab o u t 2 . 5 se c

＋ＯＮＬＹ

−ＯＮＬＹ

［Fig.７−４］ Auto. tuning trial run

− 7-14 −
［Ｐ１１４］ Auto. tuning trial run speed ratio

１．Function
In Auto. tuning function, Trial run speed of a motor is set by some ratio of rated speed.
When ０．００ is set, a motor does not run and Error occurs.
When １．００ is set, a motor runs at rated speed.
Normally, set the initial value. Since this parameter set can change motor speed,
please note it.
２．Unit, setting range
(1) Unit ： None
(2) Setting range：０．００∼１．００
(3) Initial value ：０．３０
３．Display
【Auto. tuning trial run speed ratio】
Auto. tuning trial run speed ratio is displayed.
Ｐ１１４

□．□□

Caution
By parameter［P113］and［P114］values, motor speed is determined as below.
Before executing Auto. tuning function, be sure to confirm if a load machine is in
the movable range.
(1) When P113 is“ＢＯＴＨ”.
(Motor shaft rotating amount [turns])=(P114 set value)×(Rated speed)×0.005
［Sample］P114 is 0.30 and rated speed is 3000rpm.
(Motor shaft rotating amount [turns])=0.30×3000×0.005=4.5[turns]
The motor runs forward about 4.5 turns and then, about 4.5 turns reverse.
(2) When P113 is“＋ＯＮＬＹ”or“−ＯＮＬＹ”.
Motor shaft rotating amount [turns])=(P114 set value)×(Rated speed) ×0.020
［Sample］P114 is 0.30 and rated speed 3000rpm.
(Motor shaft rotating amount [turns])=0.30×3000×0.020=18[turns]
The motor runs either forward or reverse about 18 turns.
(3) Reference sample
Reference sample when P114 is 0.30（initial value) is shown as below.
Rated P113 setting
speed ＢＯＴＨ ＋ＯＮＬＹ −ＯＮＬＹ
2000 Both of F/R: 3 turns Frd.: 12 turns Rvs.: 12 turns
3000 Both of F/R: 4.5 turns Frd.: 18 turns Rvs.: 18 turns
4000 Both of F/R: 6 turns Frd.: 24 turns Rvs.: 24 turns

３）Auto. tuning error

Error in Auto. tuning function is as follows.
Error No. Contents
ERROR1 Measured data were 0. Confirm P114 is not 0.00 and execute again.
ERROR2 Speed loop integral time const. P102 or P117 is out of the range. Since
Auto. tuning can not be executed, set the parameter, manually.
ERROR3 Measured data was abnormal. Confirm if play, etc. does not exist in a
load machine.

ERROR4 Either FOT＊ or ROT＊ is the cause of the stop.

［Tab.７−２］ Error No. list

− 7-15 −
７−４−３ Tuning level adjustment function
Tuning level adjustment function is executed in ＜Tuning level adjustment mode＞.
＜Tuning level adjustment mode ＞ can be conducted after Auto. tuning function is
completed.
And after Auto. tuning function is completed, if load changes please execute
Auto. tuning function again.
Tuning level adjustment mode is selected by next ITEM No. .
● By ITEM NO.「3468」, to adjust lower or higher gain, set adequate value to Servo
control parameters. At the time, adjust gain by watching machine action.

No. parameter name Reference

P101 Speed loop gain Set adequate value.
P102 Speed loop integral time const. Set adequate value.
P105 Speed loop gain / Low speed gain range Same set value as P101
P106 Spd.lp.intg.time cons./ L.spd.gain rng. Same set value as P102

● By ITEM NO.「3467」, to adjust lower or higher gain when GSEL is ON, set adequate
value to Servo control parameters. At the time, turn GSEL signal ON and adjust gain
by watching machine action.

No. parameter name Reference

P116 Speed loop gain / at GSEL signal ON Set adequate value.
P117 Spd.lp.intg.time cons./at GSEL sig.ON Set adequate value.

１）Tuning level adjustment function execution procedure

Operation in Tuning level adjustment function is as follows.
(ITEM 「3467」 operation is same.)

Input 3467 to ITEM No. by LCD

ＩＴＥＭ module and push key to start
Tuning level adjustment.
３４６８

Confirm LCD module display.

ＬＥＶＬ

□□

Push key to increase gain.

Push key to decrease gain.

Ｙｅｓ
Do you repeat adjustment
？
Ｎｏ
Push to finish Tuning level adjustment mode.
［Fig.７−５］ Tuning level adjustment function execution procedure

− 7-16 −
２）Display in Tuning level adjustment mode
Current gain value is displayed.
ＬＥＶＬ Range is 48 steps, 3 ∼ 50.
Smaller numeric value indicates lower gain.
□□ Larger numeric value indicates higher gain.

By pushing key level numeric value becomes large, i.e. high gain.
By pushing key level numeric value becomes small, i.e. low gain.

− 7-17 −
７−５ Forced jog mode
Forced jog mode conducts Jog motion of a motor in Test run, recovers from error, etc. .
Motor speed is setting value of the parameter［P400: JOg speed 1］.
In Forced jog mode, control signals other than FJ，RJ，FOT*，and ROT* are ignored.
１）Forced jog execution procedure
Operation in Forced jog is as follows.

Input 1102 to ITEM No. by LCD

ＩＴＥＭ module and input to start
Forced jog mode.
１１０２

Confirm LCD module display.

ＪＯＧＦ−

１２３．４５

Push key or turn FJ signal ON to run a motor

forward direction.
Push key or turn RJ signal ON to run a motor
reverse direction.

Ｙｅｓ
Do you continue
？
Ｎｏ

Push key to finish Forced jog mode. Caution 1：By pushing key, display becomes
「Display status mode」and the unit
conducts emergency stop.
Input Reset signal (RST) to return to
normal operation condition.

［Fig.７−６］ Forced jog execution procedure

２）Display in Forced jog mode

Motor direction Ｆ：Forward / Ｒ：Reverse
ＪＯＧＦ− Current position code（ ／−）
１２３．４５

Current position (Display is machine position and decimal point depends

on [P302: Command unit].)
By ／ keys, a motor can run.
When key is pushed or FJ signal is ON, a motor runs forward and when key is pushed
or RJ signal is ON, the motor runs reverse.
When a motor runs by ／ keys and FJ and RJ signals, same display is used.

Caution
① In case of changing motor speed, once finish Forced jog mode and change the value
of ［P400: Jog speed 1］.
② If Forced jog mode starts when FJ or RJ is ON, a motor immediately starts.
Please note it.

− 7-18 −
Chapter 8 Maintenance

Though the controller and a motor are maintenance free, to prevent them from un-expected
troubles caused by unit circumference change, etc. periodic inspection is recommended.

Caution
① During maintenance, the worker in charge should confirm the power ON/OFF by him.
② Since high voltage remains in the main circuit capacitors after power is turned
OFF, start maintenance after 2∼3 minutes or more passes (As for NCS-FI/FS**M-401
∼402, after front LED display「CHARGE」is lit OFf.）
③ Never conduct insulation test of the controller with a megger tester.
『The controller may be damaged.』 And in case of measuring motor insulation,
disconnect cables (U,V,W) between the motor and the controller , perfectly and
measure it.

８−１ Daily inspection

Conduct daily inspection on the following items.

【Inspection items】
(1) If the motor runs correctly.
(2) If the installation environment is normal. (power source, temperature, humidity,
dust, etc. .
(3) Inspect if the cooling system is normal.
(4) Inspect if terminals and connectors are not loose.
(5) Inspect if there is no abnormal sound or vibration.
(6) Inspect if there is no over-heat or discoloration.
(7) Inspect if Regenerative resistors, etc. are normal.

８−２ Periodic inspection

Periodically inspect the following items after a routine operation, or certain period
(every 5 months, 1 year).
【Inspection items】
(1) Inspect if there is no loose load connection, loose belt, shaft key play, or abnormal
motor bearing sound.
(2) If the installation environment is normal. (power source, temperature, humidity,
dust, etc. .
(3) Inspect if the cooling system is normal.
(4) Inspect if terminals and connectors are not loose.
(5) Inspect if there is no abnormal sound or vibration.
(6) Inspect if there is no over-heat or discoloration.
(7) Inspect if there is no alien substance or dust lump in the controller.
(8) Inspect if cables are free from flaws and fatigue.
(9) Inspect if Regenerative resistors, etc. are normal.
(10) Inspect the control cabinet radiation fans, clean air filters, and inspect or replace
relays, etc. .

− 8-1 −
８−３ Other inspection
８−３−１ Gear
It is necessary to supply and replace lubricating oil for gears of geared motors.
Replace lubricating oil every 3,000 hours.
Since lubricating oil has very important role in functioning, use only designated
lubricationg oil.(Never use machine oil, engine oil, etc. .)
If designated lubricating oil name is not indicated, ask our sales man.
In case of supplying or replacing oil to or from lubricating system, be careful not
to mix different oils or cause oil leakage.
Please supply oil to the specified level.
And confirm if bolts for gears are not loose.

８−３−２ Oil seal

Replace the oil seal every 5,000 hours.
Since any oil seal is not attached to a standard motor, if required, describe
｢With oil seal｣ on your order sheet.

８−３−３ Motor bearing

Motor bearings are special types only for motors.
Bearing life depends on working conditions but is generally about 20,000 hours.
Motor cooling blower life is identical as the above.

８−３−４ Controller
Controller part replacement guidance is described, here.
Though used parts of the controller are mainly electric parts, some of them have own life
Part replacement guidance is described in the below tabulation.

Part name Stand. life Replacement method, others

Smoothing capacitor
and other aluminum 5 years Replace with new PCB (Decide
electrolytic capacitor after inspection.).
(on PC board)

Breaker, relays, etc. (Decide after inspection.)

Cooling fan 2∼3 years Replace with new one.

Fuse 10 years Replace with new one.

［Tab.８−１］ Part replacement guidance 1

Working conditions
・ Ambient temperature ： Mean temperature in a year ３０℃
・ Load ratio ： ８０％ or less
・ Availability ： ２０ hours or less / day

Caution 1： They are based on the "Recommendation of periodic inspection of general

inverter" issued by the corporate juridial party Nippon Denki Kyokai.
However, above replacement period is just guidance and in general,
our products were designed with heavy duty parts.

− 8-2 −
Replacement guidance of other parts which have life is described in [Tab. 8-2］.

Part name Stand. life Replace. method Condition

ＬＣＤ 7 years Replace with new. 25±10℃, 65% RH or less

ＥＥＰＲＯＭ 10 years Replace with new Change frequency of parameter,

PCB (Determine Index data, command, etc.
after inspection.) 3 times / day

LIthium cell 10 years Replace with new 25±10℃, 65% RH or less

PCB (Determine Availability : 2,000h / year
after inspection.)

［Tab.８− ２］ Part replacement guidance 2

Since part life largely varies depending on temperature and humidity condition, do not use
our products in high temperature and high humidity.

− 8-3 −
Chapter 9 Error diagnosis and corrective measures
When any error occurs, conduct the following inspections or error diagnosis in order to
investigate the cause and take proper corrective measures.
When inspection and confirmation item in ［9-1 Inspection and confirmation items］is found,
or a part or a controller is supposed out of order or broken, immediately inform our sales m
an.
When Corrective measures are conducted, a worker in charge should check power ON/OFF by hims
elf.
Since high voltage remains in the main circuit condensers after power is turned OFF, start
corrective measures after 2∼3 minutes or more passes (As for NCS-FI/FS＊＊M-401∼402,
after front LED「CHARGE」is lit OFF.).
When it is necessary to touch inside of the unit, be careful not to cause damage by static
electricity.
Never conduct insulation test with a megger tester as it may damage the controller.
In case of measuring motor insulation, disconnect cables (U,V,W) between the motor and
the controller. perfectly and measure it.

９−１ Inspection and confirmation items

When an error occurs, inspection and confirm the following items.
If a spare motor or a controller is available, replace suspicious one and run it to judge
whether the controller or the motor is damaged or any external factor exists.
【Inspection and confirmation items】
(1) Inspect what Alarm display is.
(2) Inspect if no error is found by visual check.
(3) Inspect if the error reproducible, or occurs only in a particular motion.
(4) Inspect how often the error occurs.
(5) Inspect how long the unit has been used.
(6) Inspect if the power source is normal and if it fluctuates largely in particular time b
and.
(7) Inspect if power black out occurred.
(8) Inspect if motor and controller temperature is normal as well as atmosphere temperature.
(9) Inspect if installation environment of the motor and the controller is normal.
(water, oil, metal powder, paper fragments, corrosive gas, etc. )
(10) Inspect when the error occurs, during acceleration, deceleration, or at constant speed
run of the motor.
(11) Inspect if the error occurs at load fluctuation. (at load increase or decrease).
(12) Inspect if there is no difference between forward and reverse motion of the motor.
(13) Inspect if there is no error in no load run.
９−２ Protective function
９−２−１ Protective function and error treatment
The controller has various Protective function to prevent a controller or a motor from
damage, and Error treatment function to inform operation error, etc. .
Protective function consists of 「Alarm treatment」and 「Warning treatment」
And Error treatment function has 「Error display」.
① Alarm treatment
when an error is detected, a motor stops (sudden stop or Torque free based on an error
type) and Alarm signal output and Alarm message display are conducted, simultaneously.
② Warning treatment
If it is supposed to probably become error if current operation is continued, Warning
of error notice will be made.
The controller outputs Warning signal when Warning occurs and display Warning message but
does not stop motor motion.
③ Error display
When operation error, input error, etc. occurs, Error message is displayed on the spot.

Treatment description when Error occurs (detected).

Motor motion status Control out. signal LCD display
Alarm treat Sudden stop or Torque free Alarm signal ON Alarm message
Warning treat. Current motion continues. Warning signal ON Warning message
Error display Current motion continues. Un-changed Error message
［Tab.９−１］ Error occurrence and treatment

− 9-1 −
 ９−２−２ Cautions when Protective function works.
When Protective function works, it indicates some error occurred.
Before releasing Alarm, be sure to investigate the cause and delete it.

Caution
If Reset is repeated when「IPM error」or 「Over load error」occurs, a controller
could be damaged or a motor burns. Be sure to delete the cause and resume them.

① ＩＰＭ error
When following errors are detected in the power element (IPM) of the unit main circuit
(power section), IPM error occurs.
・ Over-current flew.
・ The power element is over-heated.
Be sure to delete error cause, release Alarm, and then resume Run. If Alarm is reset
before deleting error cause completely, and IPM error is repeated, the unit will be dama
ged.

② Control / Main power source under voltage error

If voltage drops due to in-sufficient power source capacity or black out
(10ms or longer) occurs, Under voltage error occurs.
If Start signal，Jog signal，Positioning start signal and Pulse train command, etc.
have been inputted when power source recovers, a motor runs. Please make sequence to
turn OFF individual signal and commands at the time Protective function works.

③ Over-voltage error
If load inertia is large, generative energy becomes huge when a motor decelerates or
stops, and over-voltage error occurs.
Be sure to delete the error, release Alarm, and then resume Run.

④ Radiator over-heat error

If a heat sink of a power element is over-heated, Radiator over-heat error occurs.
Be sure to delete the error, release Alarm, wait for about 30 minute until the heat sink
is cooled down, and then resume Run.

⑤ Motor over-heat error / breaking of thermister cable

When Enable（ALM.OH2.Y）is selected to the parameter［P736: Motor over-heat error
detection Enable / Disable selection］, if motor temperature is 150 ℃ or more,
or a thermister cable in disconnected or broken, this error occurs.
Be sure to delete the error, release Alarm, wait until motor temperature is down,
and then resume Run.

⑥ Encoder fault
In case of disconnection or broke of an encoder cable, loose fit of a connecter loose,
mis-setting of the parameters (P000∼P002), etc. , Encoder fault occurs.
If the encoder itself is faulty, Encoder fault could not be detected. In the case,
Over-load error occurs when a motor runs.

⑦ Over-speed error
When speed over-shoot is too large at motor start due to large inertia, etc. ,
Over- speed error occurs. Be sure to delete the error, release Alarm, and then resume Ru
n.

− 9-2 −
⑧ Over-load error
When an internal electric thermal relay is activated due to over-load or too frequent
ON/OFF operation than stipulated times, Over-load error occurs.
Be sure to delete the error, release Alarm, wait for about 30 minute until the heat sink
is cooled down, and then resume Run.
And two types of an internal electric thermal, standard (STD) and large capacity (BIG)
can be selected by the parameter［P121: Electric thermal detection selection］.
Relation of action time of internal electric thermal and load torque is described in
［Fig.９−１(a)］Standard（STD) and ［Fig.９−１(b)］Large capacity（BIG).

Action time 100% 200% 300%

(second)

６０

３０ Caution 1: Motor rated torque = 100 %

１５
１０
６
（ＳＴＤ） Load torque
110 150 180 210 250
(% to rated torque)
［Fig.９−１(a)］Standard (STD) internal electric thermal action time

Action time 100% 200% 300%

(second)

６０ Caution 1: Motor rated torque = 100 %

３０

１５
１０
６
（ＢＩＧ） Load torque
180 250
(% to rated torque)
［Fig.９−１(b)］Large capacity (BIG) internal electric thermal action time

Caution of internal electric thermal :

Since torque current（％）＝ torque（％）under motor rated speed, the latitude unit could
be ｢Load torque (% to rated torque)｣.
In case of field control, under motor rated speed （Magnet flux control base speed),
torque / torque current is smaller in inverse ratio to speed.
Foe example, at 200 % speed of motor rated speed, to generate rated torque, 200 % torque
current of rated torque current is flown.

− 9-3 −
９−２−３ Protective function list
１） Alarm list

Name Motion and

Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

ＩＰＭ error Due to line-to-ground of Motor torque ①Power reinput

motor or same and short- free. ②Reset signal
circuit of U,V,W cables (RST) input
between controller and Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． motor over-current flows Warning OFF
ＩＰＭ ＥＲＲ． in main circuit transis- Servo ready
ter or cooling heat sink OFF
for power element is Brake release
over-heated. OFF
Control power under Control power（+5V、+15 Motor torque ①Power reinput
voltage error V）voltage dropped. free ②Reset signal
DC+5V ：About +4.75V or (RST) input
less Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． DC+15V：About +13.5V or Warning OFF
ＵＮＤＲＶＯＬＴ１ less Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Main power source under Main circuit DC bus Motor stops ①Power reinput
voltage error voltage dropped less and torq. free ②Reset signal
than 180[370]V. by〔P713〕. (RST) input
In［ ], value of 400V
ＡＬＭ． type（In case of contro- Alarm ON
ＵＮＤＲＶＯＬＴ２ ller combined with main Warning OFF
power type detects Servo ready
Alarm.) OFF
Brake release
OFF
Over-voltage error Due to excess load in- Motor torque ①Power reinput
ertia, etc.at motor stop free ②Reset signal
or decel. regenerative (RST) input
energy is beyond capaci- Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． ty and DC power voltage Warning OFF
of main circuit exceeds Servo ready
about 400 [820]V. OFF
ＯＶＥＲ ＶＯＬＴ In [ ], value of 400V Brake release
type OFF
Motor over-heat error Motor temp. detection Motor torque Wait until
thermister is 150℃ or free motor becomes
more. cool, then
Alarm ON ①Power reinput
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF ②Reset signal
ＯＶＥＲＨＥＡＴ２ Servo ready (RST) input
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Disconnection of Cable of motor temp. Motor torque Confirm wiring,
thermister detection thermister is free then
broken or disconnected. ①Power reinput
Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF (RST) input
ＴＨＥＲＭＩＳＴ． Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Encoder fault ①Encoder fault Motor torque Confirm encoder,
②Disconnect. or break free encoder cable
of encoder cable or and parameter
loose fitness of Alarm ON 「P001」, then
ＡＬＭ． connector. Warning OFF ①Power reinput
ＥＮＣＯＤＥＲ ③Wrong encoder selection Servo ready
by parameter, etc. OFF
occurred. Brake release
OFF
［Tab.９−２(a)］ Alarm list 1/9

− 9-4 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status
Motor shaft error at Motor shaft has been Motor torque Power reinput.
rotated or vibrated when free
power is turned ON. In
ＡＬＭ． the case, encoder can Alarm ON
ＰＷ．ＯＮ ＥＮＣ not be initialized. Warning OFF
【Detection only for Servo ready
power input NCS-FS type】 OFF

Overspeed error Motor speed is more than Motor torque ①Power reinput
about 130 % of rated free ②Reset signal
speed. (RST) input
Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF
ＯＶＥＲＳＰＥＥＤ Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Over-load error Due to over-load, or Motor torque ①Power reinput
too frequent ON/OFF free ②Reset signal
than allowable times, (RST) input
internal electric Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． thermal is activated. Warning OFF
ＯＶＥＲ ＬＯＡＤ Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
AC loss detection error AC power voltage dropped Motor stops ①Power reinput
ress than about 145[290] and torque ②Reset signal
V for 50ms or more. free by[P713]. (RST) input
(Black out occurred.)
ＡＬＭ． In [ ], value of 400V Alarm ON
ＡＣ ＤＯＷＮ type Warning OFF
Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Deviation over-flow Position deviation Sudden motor ①Power reinput
exceeds setting value of stop and torq. ②Reset signal
〔P207：Over-flow detec- free (RST) input
tion pulse〕.
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON
ＯＶＥＲＦＬＯＷ Warning OFF
Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Deviation error Position deviation Sudden motor ①Power reinput
exceeds setting of〔P208 stop and Servo ②Reset signal
： Deviation error dete- lock (RST) input
ction pulse〕. ※ But
it is applied when ｢STOP Alarm ON
:Alarm stop」is selected Warning OFF
ＡＬＭ． by〔P209：Motion selection Servo ready
ＶＡＲＩ．ＯＶＥＲ at Deviation error〕. ON *1
Brake release
ON
*1：Status when「RDY1」is selected by［P716: RDY signal spec. selection］.
If other is selected, status could be different.
［Tab.９−２(b)］ Alarm list 2/9

− 9-5 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Forward over travel Forward over travel Sudden motor ①Motor moves
signal (FOT) is detected. stop and Servo to reverse by
lock Jog motion and
release forward
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON over-travel.
＋ＨＡＲＤ ＯＴ． Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Reverse over travel Reverse over travel Sudden motor ①Motor moves
signal (ROT) is detected. stop and Servo to forward by
lock Jog motion and
release reverse
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON over-travel.
−ＨＡＲＤ ＯＴ． Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Forward software Current position exceeds Sudden motor s ①Motor moves
over travel setting value of〔P306 top and Servo to reverse
：Forward software OT lock travel limit
limit〕. by Jog motion.
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON
＋ＳＯＦＴ ＯＴ． Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Reverse software Current position exceeds Sudden motor ①Motor moves
over travel setting value of〔P307 stop and Servo to forward
：Reverse software OT lock travel limit
limit〕. by Jog motion.
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON
−ＳＯＦＴ ＯＴ． Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
*1：Status when「RDY1」is selected by［P716: RDY signal spec. selection］.
If other is selected, status could be different.
［Tab.９−２(c)］ Alarm list 3/9

− 9-6 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

No set of motor type Setting of〔P000：Motor Motor torque Set motor type,
type〕is ｢000｣. free then
①Power reinput
Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF
ＭＯＴＲＴＹＰＥ１ Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Motor type error Combination of motor and Motor torque Set motor type
controller selected by free correctly, then
〔P000：Motor type〕is ①Power reinput
wrong. Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF
ＭＯＴＲＴＹＰＥ２ Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Extended memory cell Voltage of data hold Motor torque ①Reset signal
under voltage error cell for extended memory free (RST) input.
(option) dropped. Immediate
(Only once, Alarm is Alarm ON replacement of
ＡＬＭ． outputted in power ON Warning OFF extended memory
ＲＡＭ ＢＡＴＴ． status.） Servo ready by us is
OFF required.
Brake release
OFF
EEPROM (nan-volatile) Write of data to EEPROM Sudden motor ①Power reinput
write error (in controller) was stop and Servo ②Reset signal
failed. lock (RST) input
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON
ＷＲ．ＥＥＰＲＯＭ Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Rated speed command Speed at motor rated Motor torque Correct〔P303，P
error 1 speed set by〔P303,P304: free 304： Electric
Electric gear ratio〕and gear ratio〕and
〔P310：Machine travel Alarm ON 〔P310： Machine
ＡＬＭ． amount〕exceeds 2M Warning OFF travel amount〕,
ＳＴＤ．ＳＰＤ．１ （setting unit / sec）. Servo ready then
OFF ①Power reinput
Brake release ②Reset signal
Rated speed command Speed at motor rated OFF (RST) input
error 2 speed set by〔P303,P304:
Electric gear ratio〕and
〔P310：Machine travel
ＡＬＭ． amount〕is less than
ＳＴＤ．ＳＰＤ．２ 100mm
（setting unit / sec）.
Address set error Command out of 0∼279 Motor servo Correct to right
range was specified and lock address, then
tried. ①Power reinput
Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF (RST) input
ＡＤＤＲ ＥＲＲ． Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
*1：Status when「RDY1」is selected by［P716: RDY signal spec. selection］.
If other is selected, status could be different.
［Tab.９−２(d)］ Alarm list 4/9

− 9-7 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Positioning time over Positioning is not A motor sudden ①Power reinput

completed after set time stops and in ②Reset signal
[P203：Positioning servo lock. (RST) input
time over〕passed.
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON
ＴＩＭＥ ＯＵＴ Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Positioning data Simple continuous Motor in servo Set continuous
over-flow positioning is tried to lock travel distance
execute continuous in the range.
travel distance out of Alarm ON ①Power reinput
ＡＬＭ． range 2147483647∼ Warning OFF ②Reset signal
ＤＡＴＡ ＯＶＥＲ -2147483647. Servo ready ON *1 (RST) input
Brake release
ON
No 1 rotation data Without setting of〔P305 Motor in servo Set〔P305：Index
set error ：Index positioning lock positioning
range〕, i.e.「0」, range〕correctly,
Index positioning or Alarm ON then,
ＡＬＭ． Spin command is tried Warning OFF ①Power reinput
Ｐ３０５ ＥＲＲ． to execute. Servo ready ON *1 ②Reset signal
Brake release (RST) input
ON
No program end In executing command A motor sudden Input correct
ommand set error other than 0, address stops and in program, then,
becomes 280 due to no servo lock. ①Power reinput
PEND command set. ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． Alarm ON (RST) input
ＰＥＮＤ．ＥＲＲ． Warning OFF
Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Subroutine call Subroutine call is Motor in servo Input correct
esting over tried to execute 9 times lock program, then,
without executing ①Power reinput
Subroutine return. Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF (RST) input
ＣＡＬＬ ＯＶＥＲ Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Subroutine Subroutine call is Motor in servo Input correct
return error tried to execute lock program, then,
without executing ①Power reinput
Subroutine return. Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF (RST) input
ＲＥＴ ＥＲＲ． Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
*1：Status when 「RDY1」is selected by [P716: RDY signal spec. selection].
If other is selected, status could be different.
［Tab.９−２(e)］ Alarm list 5/9

− 9-8 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Jump address error Jump to address or Motor in servo Input correct

Subroutine addresses is lock address, then,
set other than range 0 ①Power reinput
∼278 and was tried to Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． execute the command. Warning OFF (RST) input
ＪＵＭＰ ＥＲＲ． Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Spin command error Without executing SPNS A motor sudden Input correct
command, SPNT or SPNP stops and in program, then
is tried to execute. Or servo lock. program, then,
in Spinning, command ①Power reinput
ＡＬＭ． other than SPNS, SPNT,SP Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＳＰＮ．ＥＲＲ． NP is tried to execute. Warning OFF (RST) input
Or, SPNS or SPNT is Servo ready ON *1
executed by Address 279. Brake release
ON
Division error 「0」is tried to execute Motor in serv Input correct
as divisor. lock divisor, then
①Power reinput
Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF (RST) input
０ＤＩＶ．ＥＲＲ． Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Positioning amount error Positioning command is Motor in servo Input correct
tried to execute by the lock data, then,
setting over Parameter ①Power reinput
〔P308： Max. Forward po Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． sitioning amount〕or Warning OFF (RST) input
ＰＯＳ ＯＶＥＲ 〔P309：Max. Reverse Servo ready ON *1
positioning amount〕. Brake release
ON
Error command Command which can not be Motor in servo Input correct
identified is tried to lock data, then,
execute. ①Power reinput
(It occurs when an error Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． command is registered Warning OFF (RST) input
ＣＭＮＤ．ＥＲＲ． by communication ） Servo ready ON *1
Brake release
ON
Index data № error Command specified Index Motor in servo Input correct
data No. out of 0∼999 lock data, then,
is tried to execute.(It ①Power reinput
occurs when Index data Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． offset No. is used or Warning OFF (RST) input
ＩＸＮＯ．ＥＲＲ． error index data No.is Servo ready ON *1
registered by communic- Brake release
ation. ） ON
*1：Status when 「RDY1」is selected by [P716: RDY signal spec. selection].
If other is selected, status could be different.
［Tab.９−２(f)］ Alarm list 6/9

− 9-9 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Stored data error 1∼39, Stored data are broken. Motor in torq. Reset data, then
42 free ①Power reinput
②Reset signal
Alarm ON (RST) input
ＡＬＭ． Warning OFF But since DATA39
ＤＡＴＡ １ Servo ready error release is
１∼３９、 OFF impossible,
４２ Brake release consult us.
OFF

Display Description
ＤＡＴＡ １ Parameter data（Group0／P000∼99) were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２ Parameter data（Group1／P100∼199）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３ Parameter data（Group2／P200∼299）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ４ Parameter data（Group3／P300∼399）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ５ Parameter data（Group4／P400∼499）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ６ Parameter data（Group5／P500∼599）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ７ Parameter data（Group6／P600∼699）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ８ Parameter data（Group7／P700∼799）were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ９ Command data（Address 000∼009） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １０ Command data（Address 010∼019） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １１ Command data（Address 020∼029） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １２ Command data（Address 030∼039） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １３ Command data（Address 040∼049） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １４ Command data（Address 050∼059） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １５ Command data（Address 060∼069） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １６ Command data（Address 070∼079） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １７ Command data（Address 080∼089） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １８ Command data（Address 090∼099） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ １９ Command data（Address 100∼109） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２０ Command data（Address 110∼119） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２１ Command data（Address 120∼129） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２２ Command data（Address 130∼139） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２３ Command data（Address 140∼149） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２４ Command data（Address 150∼159） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２５ Command data（Address 160∼169） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２６ Command data（Address 170∼179） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２７ Command data（Address 180∼189） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２８ Command data（Address 190∼199） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ２９ Command data（Address 200∼209） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３０ Command data（Address 210∼219） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３１ Command data（Address 220∼229） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３２ Command data（Address 230∼239） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３３ Command data（Address 240∼249） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３４ Command data（Address 250∼259） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３５ Command data（Address 260∼269） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３６ Command data（Address 270∼279） were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３７ Index data (IX00∼IX49) were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ３９ Adjustment data for unit shipment were broken.
ＤＡＴＡ ４２ Index data (IX100∼IX999) were broken.
Only units equipped with extended memory can detect.

［Tab.９−２(g)］ Alarm list 7/9

− 9-10 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Absolute encoder Preload is not completed Motor in servo ①Power reinput

preload error after preload of Absol- lock ②Reset signal
ute encoder works. (RST) input
※Applied when Absolute Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． encoder is used. Warning OFF
ＡＢＳ．ＰＲＥ．Ｌ Servo ready ON
Brake released
OFF
Absolute encoder External battery voltage Motor in torq. Replace external
battery error for Absolute encoder free battery, then,
data back up dropped. ①Power reinput
『Detected when power is Alarm ON ②Reset signal
ＡＬＭ． turned ON.』 Warning OFF (RST) input
ＡＢＳ．ＢＡＴＴ． ※Applied when Absolute Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Absolute encoder Counter error of Absolu- Motor in torq. ①Power reinput
count error te encoder occurs. free ②Reset signal
(RST) input
※Applied when Absolute Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． encoder is used. Warning OFF
ＡＢＳ．ＣＯＵＮＴ Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Absolute encoder Rotating amount of Motor in torq. ①Power reinput
over-flow error Absolute encoder is more free ②Reset signal
than ±4095 turns. (RST) input
Alarm ON Initialize sett-
ＡＬＭ． ※Applied when Absolute Warning OFF ing of Absolute
ＡＢＳ．ＯＶＥＲ encoder is used. Servo ready encoder.
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Absolute encoder Absolute position data Motor in torq. ①Power reinput
data back up error backed up in Absolute free ②Reset signal
encoder is gone. (RST) input
※Applied when Absolute Alarm ON Initialize sett-
ＡＬＭ． encoder is used. Warning OFF ing of Absolute
ＡＢＳ．ＢＡＫＵＰ Servo ready encoder.
OFF
Brake release
OFF
Absolute encoder Data Absolute encoder Motor in torq. ①Power reinput
communication error can not be received. free ②Reset signal
(RST) input
※Applied when Absolute Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． encoder is used. Warning OFF
ＡＢＳ．ＣＯＭＭ． Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
［Tab.９−２(h)］ Alarm list 8/9

− 9-11 −
 Name Motion and
Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

SQB (Sequence control ①Access from SQB has Motor in torq. ①Power reinput
section) Alarm been lost for 10 sec. free
at power ON, and 1
sec. in normal condition. Alarm ON
ＡＬＭ． ②Self-diagnostic or Warning OFF
ＳＱＢ ＥＲＲ． Forced jog mode is Servo ready
changed. OFF
Brake release
OFF
Remote sequ.control IC fault IC part to control comm- Motor in torq. Repair it by our
unication of Remote free service sec. .
sequence control is
ＡＬＭ． broken. Alarm ON
ＮＥＴ ＩＣ ＥＲ Warning OFF
Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF

Remote sequ.cont.commun.error Communication of Remote Motor in torq. Reinput power to

sequence control can not free whole system
be used. It occurs when where Sequence
ＡＬＭ． power of a controller Alarm ON control is rem-
ＮＥＴ ＥＲＲ． using Sequence control Warning OFF otely connected.
is turned OFF first. Servo ready
OFF
Brake release
OFF
ＣＰＵ fault Unit is out of order. Motor in torq. ①Power reinput
free
②Replace or
ＡＬＭ． Alarm flashes. repair the unit
ＣＰＵ ＲＡＭ Warning OFF by us.
Servo ready
OFF
ＡＬＭ． Brake release
ＥＸ ＲＡＭ OFF

ＡＬＭ．
ＤＳＰ ＢＯＯＴ

ＡＬＭ．
ＤＳＰ ＢＯＯＴ１

ＡＬＭ．
ＤＳＰ ＰＡＲＡ

ＣＰＵ fault Due to fault of CPU, Motor in torq. ①Power reinput

memory (ROM,RAM), etc. free
Front ＬＥＤ is lit. Watch dog timer alarm Alarm ON ②Replace or
is activated. Warning OFF repair the unit
Servo ready by us.
OFF
HALT ● Brake release
OFF

［Tab.９−２(i)］ Alarm list 9/9

− 9-12 −
２） Warning list

Name Motion and

Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Over load warning If current running Current motion ①Delete cause

conditions are continue- continues. of Over-load.
d, Over-load error will
occur. Alarm OFF
ＷＮＧ． Warning ON
ＯＶＥＲ．ＬＯＡＤ Servo ready ON
Brake release
ON
Deviation error warning Position deviation exce- Current motion ①Delete cause
eds set of〔P208：Devia- continues. of Deviation
tion error detection pu- error.
lse〕. Alarm OFF (Load increase,
ＷＮＧ． ※Applied when Warning ON wrong setting
ＶＡＲＩ．ＯＶＥＲ 『Continuous motion』is Servo ready ON of gain,
selected by [P209: Brake release Accel./Decel/
Motion selection at ON time, etc.）
Deviation abnormal].

Main power under voltage Main circuit DC bus voltage Motor in torq. Recover main
detection warning becomes 180[370]V or free power source to
less. In [ ], value of normal voltage
400V type （In case of Alarm OFF range.
ＷＮＧ． controller not combined Warning ON
ＵＮＤＲＶＯＬＴ２ with power source, this Servo ready
warning is detected.） OFF
Brake release
OFF

Zero return incomplete Since Auto. run started Neglects Auto. ①Execute Zero
auto. start warning告 in Zero return incomple- start signal. return.
te status, Start signal (When mode
is ignored.※ When〔P409 Alarm OFF other than
ＷＮＧ． ：Auto.run permit codit- Warning ON Auto. mode
ＨＯＭＥ．ＥＲＲ． ion selection〕is no Servo ready ON is selected,
condition, this is not Brake release Warning is
detected. ON OFF.)
Absolute encoder External battery voltage Current motion ①Replace
battery error warning for Absolute encoder continues. external
data back up dropped. battery.
『Detected,always.』 Alarm OFF
ＷＮＧ． ※Applied when Absolute Warning ON
ＡＢＳ．ＢＡＴＴ． encoder is used. Servo ready ON
Brake release
ON
Absolute encoder preload Preload and preset of Current motion ①Execute
incomplete warning Absolute encoder is continues. preload and
not completed. preset program.
※Applied when Absolute Alarm OFF
ＷＮＧ． encoder is used. Warning ON
ＡＢＳ．ＰＲＥ．Ｌ Servo ready ON
Brake release
ON
Remote sequence control Communication for Remote Current motion Turn power of
commun. waiting warning sequence control is not control ON for
started.This occurs when Alarm OFF Remote Sequence
controller for Remote Warning ON control.
ＷＮＧ． sequence control is not Servo ready ON
ＮＥＴ ＮＯＲＤＹ functioning. Brake release
ON
［Tab.９−３］ Warning list

− 9-13 −
３） Error list

Name Motion and

Contents output signal Way to release
Display status

Data input range error Inputted parameter and In Edit mode, ①Release error
data value is out of motor continu- by input of any
setting range. es present key and reset
motion. correct data.
ＥＲＲ． Output signal
ＥＤＩＴ １ is not changed.

Data setting value error Computed results with In Edit mode, ①Release error
plural associated values motor continu- by input of any
are out of setting range. es present key and reset
motion. correct data.
ＥＲＲ． Output signal
ＥＤＩＴ ２ is not changed.

Duplicate operation Same address command is In Edit mode, ①Release error

error edited by LCD module motor continu- by input of any
and MDI, simultaneously. es present key and operate
motion. by only either
ＥＲＲ． Output one.
ＥＤＩＴ ３ signal is not
changed.

［Tab.９−４］ Error list

− 9-14 −
 ９−２−４ Inspection method and measures when Protective function works.
When an error occurs, please confirm error contents by Alarm display, and take proper measures.
Before releasing Alarm, be sure to delete error cause.
If an error occurs repeatedly, the unit could be damaged.

Description Cause Corrective measures

【ＩＰＭ fault】 ・Line-to-ground of a motor ・Replace the motor.
・Due to line-to-ground ・Line-to-ground and short- ・Correct the wiring.
error of a motor, or the circuit between a controller
same error, short-circuit and a motor
or mis-wiring of cables
(U,V,W) between a cont- ・Current fluctuation due to ・Adjust stability.(Adjust gain ,
roller and a motor, unstable motor motion and improve machine system play,
Overcurrent flows in vibration etc. )
main circuit transistors.
・AC power source voltage ・Power source voltage is ・Supply correct power.
is out of spec. range. out of spec. range or
And Over-current flows fluctuates largely .
in main circuit transistor
・Malfunction due to noise ・Remove noise source and take
anti-noise measures.
【ＩＰＭ fault】 ・High ambient temperature ・Lower ambient temperature.
・Power elements are or bad ventilation Improve ventilation.
over-heated.
・Stop of cooling fan ・Replace the cooling fan.
【Over-load error】 ・Excess load ・Decrease load.
・Due to over-load or too ・Too frequent start and ・Decrease frequency of motor ON/
frequent motor ON / OFF stop of a motor OFF.
than allowable times, an
internal electric thermal ・Incorrect wiring（U,V,W） ・Correct wiring.
is activated. between a controller and
a motor
・Motor value different
from the applied type ・Encoder feedback signal is ・Remove noise source and take
is set to Parameters influenced by noise. anti-noise measures.
P000∼P002.
・Encoder failure ・Replace the encoder.
・Mechanical locking with ・Release the brake.
a brake, etc. If there is a problem in machine
system, fix it.
・Current fluctuation due ・Adjust stability. (Adjust gain
to unstable motor motion and improve play of machine system,
and vibration looseness ofconnecting section,
weak machinerigidity, etc. .）
・ High ambient temperature ・Lower ambient temperature.
or bad ventilation Improve ventilation.
・ Wrong set of P000∼P002 ・Set correct value to P000∼P002.

− 9-15 −
 Description Cause Corrective measures
【Control power source ・Power source voltage is ・Supply power source, or
under voltage error】 low (Includes insufficient reconsider power supply system,
capacity）. capacity and cable diameter.
・Control power source ・Power black out occurred
(+5V,+15V) voltage for more than 10ms.
dropped. ・Power cables are thin.
DC+5V ：About+4.75V ・Loose screw in power
or less source terminals
DC+15V：About+13.5V
or less ・Malfunction due to noise ・Delete noise source and take
anti-noise measures.
【Main power source ・Power source voltage is ・Supply correct power source, or
under voltage error】 low (Includes insufficient reconsider power supply system,
capacity）. capacity and cable diameter.
・Main circuit DC bus ・Power black out occurred
voltage becomes 180[370] for more than 10ms.
V or less. ・Power cables are thin.
・Loose screw in power
In [ ], value of 400V type source terminals
・Malfunction due to noise ・Delete noise source and take
anti-noise measures.
【Over-voltage error】 ・Power source voltage is ・Supply correct power source.
high.
・Due to excess load iner-
tia, etc. , at motor stop ・Excessive regenerative ・Reduce load inertia or increase
or decel., regenerative energy due to too large speed or set longer decel. time.
energy is beyond capacity load inertia
and DC power voltage of
main circuit exceeds ・Malfunction due to noise ・Delete noise source and take
about 400 [820]V or more. anti-noise measures.
In [ ], value of 400V type

【Over speed error】 ・Incorrect wiring（U,V,W） ・Correct wiring.

between a controller and
・Motor speed exceeds a motor.
130％ of rated speed. ・Incorrect wiring of
Encoder feedback signal
・Encoder failure ・Replace the encoder.
・Due to excess load inertia ・Reduce load inertia or increase
or in-adequate gain setting, accel. time.
Over-shoot is large. ・Adjust stability(Adjust gain and
improve play of machine system,
looseness of connecting section,
weak machine rigidity, etc. )
・Encoder feedback signal is ・Delete noise source and take
influenced by noise. anti-noise measures.

【Encoder error】 ・Breaking, disconnection or ・Correct wiring.

incorrect wiring of
・Encoder is faulty, Encoder cable
encoder cable is broken,
not connected or a ・A connector was inserted ・Insert the connector, securely.
connector came out. incorrectly.
・Encoder failure ・Replace the encoder.
・Wrong P001 setting ・Set correct value.

− 9-16 −
 Description Cause Corrective measures
【Deviation over-flow】 ・Excess load ・Reduce load.
【Deviation error】
・Due to excess load inertia ・Reduce load inertia or increase
・Position deviation or in-adequate gain setting, accel./decel. time.
exceeds set of Parameter Over-shoot is large. ・Adjust stability(Adjust gain and
〔P207:Over-flow improve play of machine system,
detection pulse〕. looseness of connecting section,
・Position deviation weak machine rigidity, etc. )
exceeds set of Parameter
〔P208: Deviation error ・Incorrect wiring（U,V,W） ・Correct wiring.
detection pulse〕. between a controller and a
motor.
・Incorrect wiring of
Encoder feedback signal
・Encoder failure ・Replace the encoder.
・Encoder feedback signal or ・Delete noise source and take
command pulse is influenced anti-noise measures.
by noise.
【Positioning time over】 ・Mechanical block by a ・Release the brake.
brake etc. If there is a problem in machine
・Positioning is not system, fix it.
completed even after set
time of Parameter〔P203: ・Wrong parameter setting ・Check associated parameters and
Positioning time over〕 reset correct values.
has passed. ・ Excess load ・Reduce load.
・Sticking in machine ・Fix the trouble in the machine
system system.
・Gain setting is too low. ・Increase gain setting.
・Wrong parameter setting ・Check associated parameters and
reset correct values.
【Forward Over-travel】 ・Breaking, disconnection or ・Correct wiring.
【Reverse Over-travel】 incorrect wiring of Control
signal cable
・Forward over-travel
is detected. ・A connector was inserted ・Insert the connector, securely.
・Reverse Over-travel incorrectly.
is detected.
・Wrong Positioning data ・Reset correct value.
setting
・Wrong external sequence ・Correct the external sequence.
【Forward software limit】 ・Wrong Positioning setting ・Reset correct value.
【Reverse software limit】
・Wrong parameter setting ・Check associated parameters and
・Current position exceeds reset correct values.
set of Parameter〔P306:
Forward software limit〕.
・Current position exceeds
set of Parameter〔P307:
Reverse software limit〕.

【EEPROM write error】 ・Due to noise,Write of data ・Delete noise source and take
can not be conducted to anti-noise measures.
・Write can not be non-volatile memory
conducted to non-volatile (EEPROM).
memory(EEPROM).

【Positioning amount ・Wrong Positioning setting ・Reset correct value.

error】
・Wrong parameter setting ・Check associated parameters and
・In Positioning associat- reset correct values.
ed command, Positioning
amount exceeds〔P308:Max. ・Malfunction due to noise ・Delete noise source and take
Forward positioning anti-noise measures.
amount〕or〔P309:Max.
Reverse positioning
amount〕.

− 9-17 −
 Description Cause Corrective measures
【ＣＰＵ fault】 ・Malfunction due to noise ・Delete noise source and take
anti-noise measures.
・Due to CPU or memory
fault, Watch dog timer ・Unit failure ・Replace the unit.
is activated.

【Stored data error】 ・ Data is broken by noise. ・Delete noise source and take
anti-noise measures.
・Error occurs in data
contents.

［Tab.９−５］ Inspection method and measures when Protective function works

Caution
①If Reset is repeatedly conducted when IPM fault or Over-load error occurs, it may
cause controller damage and burning out of a motor.
Be sure to delete the error cause and resume units.

− 9-18 −
 ９−３ Trouble shooting
When an error occurs, investigate the cause and take proper corrective measures in
accoordance with the following proceedure.
If the cause is none of the following cases, please contact our sales or service section, so
on.

Caution
If a controller is coupled with a host control unit, separate the host unit, and
inspect the following items only to a motor and the controller.

［Fig.９−２］ A motor does not rotate.（１）

− 9-19 −
 ［Fig.９−３］ A motor does not rotate.（２）

［Fig.９−４］ Motor speed can not change or a motor runaways.

− 9-20 −
［Fig.９−５］ A motor rotates unstably or vibrates.

− 9-21 −
［Fig.９−６］ Abnormal sound is heard from a motor.

［Fig.９−７］ A motor is heated, abnormally.

− 9-22 −
 ［Fig.９−８］ Over-heat error occurs.

［Fig.９−９］ An earth leakage breker trips.

− 9-23 −
［Fig.９−１０］ Servo ready signal is not outputted.

− 9-24 −
［Fig.９−１１］ Each run start can not be executed.

− 9-25 −
CHAPTER １０ DATA

１０−１ Electric Specification of Controller

U
n ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊
Item i
t
−４０１ −８０１ −１２２ −２４２ −４０２ −７５２
Separate
Input power Integrated control power source type control power
source source type
Main power AC200V/220V， 50/60Hz，３phase
Voltage range AC180V ∼ AC242V *2
Main crcit mthd ＩＰＭ ４quadrant bridge sine wave ＰＷＭ control
Continuous out.
current (rms) Ａ ３．４ ６．４ １０．５ １５ ２７ ５４
Instant.output
current (rms) Ａ ８．８ １７．４ ２５．６ ３９ ５５ ９８
Instantaneous ％ 200%（Some motor combination 300%，Refer to 10-4「Applicable
output torque motor list」）
Control method Semi-closed loop by encoder feedback
Brake method Regenerative braking (option: power regeneration）
Carrier １０ｋ
frequency Hz
（7.5k 10k 15k selectable）
Speed control １：５０００ *1
range
Field １：３(Max. speed 6000rpm）/ rated output（some motor type:
control range reduced rated output)
Applicable ６０００（２０００）ｐｐｒ （selection by parameter）
encoder
Load inertia 10 times or less of motor rotor inertia
Power kVA １．１ １．８ ３．０ ４．７ ７．８ １５．３
capacity *3
No fuse breaker
(rated current) Ａ ５ １０ １５ ２０ ３０ ６０
*4
Applicable NA30- NA100- NA100- NA100- NA100- NA100-
motor *5
13F-15 20F 75F 110F 180F 180F
25F-15 40F 110F-10 180F-10 270F-10 270F
75F-10 NA30- 370F-10 370AF
NA30- 110F-15 NA30- 370F-10
50F-15 180F-15 550F-10
750F-10
Weight *6 kg ３．８ ３．８ ７．０ ７．０ ８．０ １２．５
Dimension Refer to Section 2 outline drawing.
Accessories Regenerative resistor Refer to Section 10-2.
* 1: A motor may not run smoothly as low speed as 1/5000 of rated speed.
Speed control range is defined that in the range a motor does not stop with
100％ load.
In case of combination with NA20 series motor, Speed control range is 1:3000.
* 2: When power source voltage drops, rated output and rated speed is not guaranteed.
* 3: It changes according to power source impedance.
* 4: Please choose sufficient shut down capacity type to conduct protective coordinate
with power source capacity.
* 5: As for applicable motor speed and peak torque, please refer to 「10-4
Applicable motor list」.
* 6: The weight for SQB installed models (NCS-FI12*-*, NCS-FI33*-*, NCS-FI34*-*,
NCS-FI43*-*, NCS-FI44*-*NCS-FI63*-*, and NCS-FI64*-*), please add 1.2 kg to the
stated weight.
［Fig.１０−１−１］ Electric Specification

-10-1 -
 U
Item n ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊
i
t
−１１３ −１５３ −２２３ −３０３ −３７３
Input power Separate control power source type
source Main power AC200V/220V， 50/60Hz，３phase
Voltage range AC180V ∼ AC242V *2
Main crcit mthd ＩＰＭ ４quadrant bridge sine wave ＰＷＭ control
Continuous out.
current (rms) Ａ ５９ ８１ １１７ １６１ １７４
Instant.output
current (rms) Ａ １０７ １４３ ２０６ ３０９ ３２９
Instantaneous ％ 200%（Some motor combination 300%，Refer to 10-4「Applicable
output torque motor list」）
Control method Semi-closed loop by encoder feedback
Brake method Regenerative braking (option: power regeneration）
Carrier １０ｋ ７．５ｋ
frequency Hz
(7.5k 10k 15k selectable）
Speed control １：５０００ *1
range
Field １：３(Max. speed 6000rpm）/ rated output（some motor type:
control range reduced rated output)
Applicable ６０００（２０００）ｐｐｒ （selection by parameter）
encoder
Load inertia 10 times or less of motor rotor inertia
Power kVA ２１ ３０ ４１ ５８ ７０
capacity *3
No fuse breaker
(rated current) Ａ １００ １２５ ２００ ２２５ ２５０
*4
Applicable NA100- NA100- NA100- NA100- NA20-
motor *5 270F 370F 1100AF 1100F 1800
550AF 750AF 750F NA20- 3700-10
550F-10 550F NA20- 1500
750F-10 NA20- 2200-10 2700-10
1100F-10 1500-10
Weight *6 kg １４．０ ２６．５ ３５．５ ３５．５ ６３．０
Dimension Refer to Section 2 outline drawing.
Accessories Regenerative resistor Refer to Section 10-2.
* 1: A motor may not run smoothly as low speed as 1/5000 of rated speed.
Speed control range is defined that in the range a motor does not stop with
100％ load.
In case of combination with NA20 series motor, Speed control range is 1:3000.
* 2: When power source voltage drops, rated output and rated speed is not guaranteed.
* 3: It changes according to power source impedance.
* 4: Please choose sufficient shut down capacity type to conduct protective coordinate
with power source capacity.
* 5: As for applicable motor speed and peak torque, please refer to 「10-4
Applicable motor list」.
* 6: The weight for SQB installed models (NCS-FI12*-*, NCS-FI33*-*, NCS-FI34*-*,
NCS-FI43*-*, NCS-FI44*-*NCS-FI63*-*, and NCS-FI64*-*), please add 1.2 kg to the
stated weight.

［Fig.１０−１−２］ Electric Specification

-10-2 -
 U
Item n ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊
i
t
−１２２ −２４２ −４０２ −７５２
Separate control
Input power Integrated control power source type powersource type
source
Main power AC200V/220V， 50/60Hz，３phase
Voltage range AC180V ∼ AC242V *2
Main crcit mthd ＩＰＭ ４quadrant bridge sine wave ＰＷＭ control
Continuous out.
current (rms) Ａ ８．３ １５．２ ２６
Instant.output
current (rms) Ａ ２４．９ ４５．６ ５２

Instantaneous ％ 200%（Some motor combination 300%，Refer to 10-4「Applicable

output torque motor list」）
Control method Semi-closed loop by encoder feedback
Brake method Regenerative braking (option: power regeneration）
Carrier １０ｋ
frequency Hz
（7.5k 10k 15k selectable）
Speed control １：５０００ *1
range
Applicable ６０００（２０００）ｐｐｒ （selection by parameter）
encoder
Load inertia 10 times or less of motor rotor inertia
Power kVA ２．６ ５．０ ８．３ １５．７
capacity *3
No fuse breaker
(rated current) Ａ １５ ２０ ３０ ６０
*4
Applicable NA720-122 NA720-182 NA720-372 NA720-372
motor *5
-242 -402 -402
-552
-752
Weight *6 kg ７．０ ７．０ ８．０ １２．５

Dimension Refer to Section 2 outline drawing.

Accessories Regenerative resistor Refer to Section 10-2.

* 1: A motor may not run smoothly as low speed as 1/5000 of rated speed.
Speed control range is defined that in the range a motor does not stop with
100％ load.
In case of combination with NA20 series motor, Speed control range is 1:3000.
* 2: When power source voltage drops, rated output and rated speed is not guaranteed.
* 3: It changes according to power source impedance.
* 4: Please choose sufficient shut down capacity type to conduct protective coordinate
with power source capacity.
* 5: As for applicable motor speed and peak torque, please refer to 「10-4
Applicable motor list」.
* 6: The weight for SQB installed models (NCS-FI12*-*, NCS-FI33*-*, NCS-FI34*-*,
NCS-FI43*-*, NCS-FI44*-*NCS-FI63*-*, and NCS-FI64*-*), please add 1.2 kg to the
stated weight.

［Fig.１０−１−３］ Electric Specification

-10-3 -
 U
Item n ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊
i
t
−１１３ −１５３ −２２３
Input power Separate control power source type
source Main power AC200V/220V， 50/60Hz，３phase
Voltage range AC180V ∼ AC242V *2
Main crcit mthd ＩＰＭ ４quadrant bridge sine wave ＰＷＭ control
Continuous out.
current (rms) Ａ ４５ ６２ ９４
Instant.output
current (rms) Ａ ８８ １２１ １８３
Instantaneous ％ 200%（Some motor combination 300%，Refer to 10-4「Applicable
output torque motor list」）
Control method Semi-closed loop by encoder feedback
Brake method Regenerative braking (option: power regeneration）
Carrier １０ｋ
frequency Hz
（7.5k 10k 15k selectable）
Seepd control １：５０００ *1
range
Applicable ６０００（２０００）ｐｐｒ （selection by parameter）
encoder
Load inertia 10 times or less of motor rotor inertia
Power kVA ２１ ３０ ４１
capacity *3
No fuse breaker
(rated current) Ａ １００ １２５ ２００
*4

Applicable NA720-552 NA720-752 NA720-223

motor *5
-113 -153

Weight *6 kg １４．０ ２６．５ ３５．５

Dimension Refer to Section 2 outline drawing.

Accessories Regenerative resistor Refer to Section 10-2.
* 1: A motor may not run smoothly as low speed as 1/5000 of rated speed.
Speed control range is defined that in the range a motor does not stop with
100％ load.
In case of combination with NA20 series motor, Speed control range is 1:3000.
* 2: When power source voltage drops, rated output and rated speed is not guaranteed.
* 3: It changes according to power source impedance.
* 4: Please choose sufficient shut down capacity type to conduct protective coordinate
with power source capacity.
* 5: As for applicable motor speed and peak torque, please refer to 「10-4
Applicable motor list」.
* 6: The weight for SQB installed models (NCS-FI12*-*, NCS-FI33*-*, NCS-FI34*-*,
NCS-FI43*-*, NCS-FI44*-*NCS-FI63*-*, and NCS-FI64*-*), please add 1.2 kg to the
stated weight.

［Fig.１０−１−４］ Electric Specification

-10-4 -
 U
Item n ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊
i
t
−１１３ −１５３ −２２３ −３０３ −３７３
Input power Separate control power source type
source Main power AC400V/440V， 50/60Hz，３ phase
Voltage range AC360V ∼ AC484V *2
Main crcit mthd ＩＰＭ ４quadrant bridge sine wave ＰＷＭ control
Continuous out.
current (rms) Ａ ３４ ４６ ６５ ８９ １１５
Instant.output
current (rms) Ａ ６２ ８１ １１２ １５４ ２１０
Instantaneous ％ 200%（Some motor combination 300%，Refer to 10-4「Applicable
output torque motor list」）
Control method Semi-closed loop by encoder feedback
Brake method Regenerative braking (option: power regeneration）
Carrier １０ｋ ７．５ｋ
frequency Hz
（7.5k 10k 15k selectable）
Seepd control １：５０００ *1
range
Field １：３(Max. speed 6000rpm）/ rated output（some motor type:
control range reduced rated output)
Applicable ６０００（２０００）ｐｐｒ （selection by parameter）
encoder
Load inertia 10 times or less of motor rotor inertia
Power kVA ２１ ３０ ４１ ５８ ７０
capacity *3
No fuse breaker
(rated current) Ａ ５０ ７５ １００ １２５ １５０
*4
Applicable NA100- NA100- NA100- NA20- NA20-
motor *5 550F-20H 750F-20H 750F-20H 1500-20H 1800-20H
1100F-10H NA20- 1100F-20H 2700-10H 3700-10H
1500-10H NA20-
2200-10H

Weight *6 kg １４．０ ２６．５ ３５．５ ３５．５ ６３．０

Dimension Refer to Section 2 outline drawing.

Accessories Regenerative resistor Refer to Section 10-2.

* 1: A motor may not run smoothly as low speed as 1/5000 of rated speed.
Speed control range is defined that in the range a motor does not stop with
100％ load.
In case of combination with NA20 series motor, Speed control range is 1:3000.
* 2: When power source voltage drops, rated output and rated speed is not guaranteed.
* 3: It changes according to power source impedance.
* 4: Please choose sufficient shut down capacity type to conduct protective coordinate
with power source capacity.
* 5: As for applicable motor speed and peak torque, please refer to 「10-4
Applicable motor list」.
* 6: The weight for SQB installed models (NCS-FI12*-*, NCS-FI33*-*, NCS-FI34*-*,
NCS-FI43*-*, NCS-FI44*-*NCS-FI63*-*, and NCS-FI64*-*), please add 1.2 kg to the
stated weight.

［Fig.１０−１−５］ Electric Specification

-10-5 -
Common specification
U
Item n Specification
i
t
External analog torque limit command: DC 0∼+10V (+3.3V/
Torque limit rated / torque) Input resistance about 20kΩ (resolution
10bit), Forward/ reverse each １(2ch) Internal digital t orque
limit value： Forward/ reverse each １(parameter)
Pulse train Max. frequency １ Ｍpps
control
Pulse command Line driver method (directional pulse) :Max. 250Kpps
method Line driver method (90°different 2 phase pulse):Max.250Kpps
Open collector method（direction judge. pulse) :Max.200Kpps
Pulse train 1/100 ≦ A/B ≦ 100 （A,B ： 1∼65535）
compensation
Encoder 90°different 2 phase pulse signal, Marker signal
pulse Output style：Line driver method
output Division ratio ：1/N （N=1∼32)

Serial RS-422A, Start/stop synchro. Multi-drop wiring is possible.

communication （Communication condition parameter set is possible.) 56kbbs
Monitor LCD module (installed)： Status display, Diagnostic display,
function Input/Output signal display
Alarm display (last 5 cause history)
Analog monitor： Speed, Torque, Deviation, etc.
(selection by parameter)
Control function 2 free degree control, FF control, Vibration filter,
R2 compensation, Auto. tuning
Non-interacting compensation, Dead time compensation
IPM error, Under voltage, Over voltage, Over load,
Protective Over speed, Encoder failure, Deviation over flow,
function Communication error Each data and parameter error, etc.
（Last 5 cause history is stored.)
［36 kinds］
Input signal Servo ON (SON(*)), Emergency stop (EMG*), Reset (RST), Remote
/ Local change (PC), Mode selection (MD1,MD2), Auto. start
(PST), Address set (SS1∼PS8),Forward jog (FJ), Reverse jog
(RJ), Hold (HLD), Speed override (OR1∼4), Deviation clear
(CLR), Command pulse input inhibit (CIH(*)), External trigger
(TRG), Zero point decel. (ZLS), Forward over travel (FOT*),
Reverse over travel (ROT*)
＜Below signals can be allocated by Remote control or input
signal allocation and used.＞
M complete (MFIN), Block stop (BSTP), Program cancel (PCAN),
Speed gain selection (GSEL), Forced brake ON (BRON), Torque limit
(TL), External auto. stop inhibit (EPIH), Jog speed change (JOSP)
［34 kinds］
Output signal Servo ready (RDY), Alarm (ALM(*)), Warning (WNG(*)), In torque
limit (LIM), Speed zero (SZ), Positioning complete (PN)，
Brake release (BRK), Rough matching (PRF)
＜Below signals can be allocated by Remote control or output
signal allocation and used.＞
Program end (PEND), Auto. run ready (PRDY), In Manual run
(MMOD), In Auto.run (AMOD), In Remote mode (RMOD), In Zero return
run (HMOD), In Pulse train run (PMOD), M strobe (MSTB), Software
limit switch(SLSA,SLSB),General output(OUT1∼8),M output(M01∼M80)
Option Data input unit (MDI unit), Servo display, Cables , etc.

* 1: It is possible to externally input the MFIN signal in some models.

* 2: In some models, it is possible to externally output the General-purpose output/M
output and Soft limit switch/M strobing signal by selecting parameter.

［Fig.１０−２］ Electric Specification

-10-6 -
１０−２ Regenerative Resistor Combination
１ ０ − ２ − １ Regenerative Resistor Combination
【 ２ ０ ０ Ｖ system controller Regenerative resistor】
Controller type Applicable Regenerative resistor (kind)
motor
NCS-FIM*-401 NA30-13F-15 RGH-60-FV-80 60w,80Ω -1pc
NA30-25F-15
Cement resistor outline： TYPE １
NCS-FIM*-801 NA100-20F RGH-60-FV-80 60w,80Ω -1pc
NA100-40F
NA100-75F-10 Cement resistor outline： TYPE １
NA30-50F-15
NCS-FIM*-122 NA100-75F RGH-200-FV-40 200w,40Ω -1pc
NA100-110F-10
Cement resistor outline： TYPE 2
NCS-FIM*-242 NA100-110F RGH-200-FV-40 200w,40Ω -1pc
NA100-180F-10
NA30-110F-15 Cement resistor outline： TYPE 2

NCS-FIM*-402 NA100-180F RGH-400-FV-20 400w,20Ω -1pc

NA100-270F-10
NA100-370F-10 Cement resistor outline： TYPE 3
NA30-180F-15

NCS-FIM*-752 NA100-180F RGH-200G-0S 200w,40Ω -3pcs

NA100-270F (Parallel connect.total 600w 13.3Ω)
NA100-370AF Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 4
NA100-370F-10
NA100-550F-10
NA100-750F-10
NCS-FIM*-113 NA100-550AF RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -3pcs
NA100-1100F-10 (Parallel connect.total 1.5 kw 8Ω )
NA100-550F-10 Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NA100-750F-10
NA100-270F
NCS-FIM*-153 NA100-750AF RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -4pcs
NA100-550F (Parallel connect.total 2.0 kw 6Ω )
NA20-1500-10 Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NA100-370F
NCS-FIM*-223 NA100-1100AF RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -6pcs
NA100-750F (Parallel connect.total 3.0 kw 4Ω )
NA20-2200-10 Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FIM*-303 NA100-1100F RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -8pcs
NA20-1500 (Parallel connect.total 4.0 kw 3Ω )
NA20-2700-10 Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FIM*-373 NA20-1800 RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -10pcs
NA20-3700-10 (Parallel connect.total 5.0kw 2.4Ω)
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5

- 10-7 -
【 Synchronous type controller Regenerative resistor】

Controller type Applicable Regenerative resistor (kind)

motor
NCS-FSM*-122 NA720-122 RGH-60-FV-80 60w,80Ω -1pc
Sement resistor outline： TYPE 2

NCS-FSM*-242 NA720-182 RGH-200-FV-40 200w,40Ω -1pc

NA720-242
Semet resistor outline： TYPE 2
NCS-FSM*-402 NA720-372 RGH-400-FV-20 400w,20Ω -1pc
NA720-402
Sement resistor outline： TYPE 3
NCS-FSM*-752 NA720-372 RGH-200G-0S 200w,40Ω -3pcs
NA720-402 (Parallel connect.total 600w 13.3Ω)
NA720-552 Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 4
NA720-752

NCS-FSM*-113 NA720-552 RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -3pcs

NA720-113 (Parallel connect.total 1.5kw 8Ω )
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FSM*-153 NA720-752 RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -4pcs
NA720-153 (Parallel connect.total 2.0 kw 6Ω )
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FSM*-223 NA720-223 RGH-500-0S 500w,24Ω -6pcs
(Parallel connect.total 3.0 kw 4Ω )
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5

【 ４ ０ ０ Ｖ system Induction type controller Regenerative resistor】

Controller type Applicable Regenerative resistor (kind)

motor
NCS-FIH*-113 NA100-550F-20H RGH-500-0S 500w,100Ω -3pcs
NA100-1100F-10H (Parallel connect.total 1.5 kw 33Ω)
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FIH*-153 NA100-750F-20H RGH-500-0S 500w,100Ω -4pcs
NA20-1500-10H (Parallel connect.total 2.0 kw 25Ω)
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NPS-FIH*-223 NA100-1100F-20H RGH-500-0S 500w,100Ω -6pcs
NA20-2200-10H (Parallel connect.total 3.0kw 16.6Ω)
NA100-750F-20H Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FIH*-303 NA20-1500-20H RGH-500-0S 500w,100Ω -8pcs
NA20-2700-10H (Parallel connect.total 4.0 kw 12.5Ω)
NA100-1100F-20H Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5
NCS-FIH*-373 NA20-1800-20H RGH-500-0S 500w,100Ω -10pcs
NA20-3700-10H (Parallel connect.total 5.0kw 10Ω)
Enamel resistor outline： TYPE 5

- 10-8 -
１ ０ − ２ − ２ Regenerative resistor outline drawing
Enamel resistor outline,dimension and thermostat install place si as follows.
２７

Ｌ２
Ｌ１
AMP250 or equivalent
Temperature sensor AMP187 or equivalent
Thermostat(screw type)

Thermostat block for Regenerative resistor

Regenerative resistor

(Attach the thermostat and tighten it with a screw common to Regenerative resistor installation.)

Type Rated Ｌ１ Ｌ２ Ｗ Ｈ Ｌ３ Ｄ Outline

power
RGH60 60W 115 100 20 40 5 4.3 TYPE１
RGH200 200W 215 200 25 50 8 5.3 TYPE２
RGH400 400W 265 250 30 60 13 5.3 TYPE３

22
E
4
D AMP187 or equivalent

G 0
F 6

H18
32
C

102
A
116
B

Type Rated Ａ Ｂ Ｃ Ｄ Ｅ F G H Outline

power
RGH200 200w 282 304 54 6 32 7 2.2 29 TYPE 4
RGH500 500w 350 380 99 10 57 13 5.2 49 TYPE 5

- 10-9 -
１０−３ Electric Specificaton of Motor cooling Blowers

【ＡＣ２００Ｖ system motor cooling blower】

Input power source
Motor type ２００Ｖ／５０Ｈｚ ２００Ｖ／６０Ｈｚ Power
Power Rated Power Pated source
consump. current consump. current poles
（Ｗ） （Ａ） （Ｗ） (Ａ）
NA100-110F/-10 ２２ ０．１８ １８ ０．１５ 3Φ 2Ｐ
NA100-180F/-10 ４０ ０．３０ ５０ ０．２５
NA100-270F/-10 ４０ ０．３０ ５０ ０．２５
NA100-370F/-10 ４０ ０．３０ ５０ ０．２５
NA100-550F/-10 ,-550AF ４５ ０．３２ ６３ ０．３５
NA100-750F/-10 , -750AF １０５ ０．６５ １４５ ０．８
NA100-1100F/-10, -1100AF １５０ １．０ １８０ ０．８２
NA20-1500/-10 ６２０ ２．０ ６５０ ２．０
NA20-1800 ６２０ ２．０ ６５０ ２．０
NA20-2200/-10 ６２０ ２．０ ６５０ ２．０
NA20-2700/-10 ６２０ ２．０ ６５０ ２．０
NA20-3700/-10 ６２０ ２．０ ６５０ ２．０

【ＡＣ４００Ｖsystem motor cooling blower】

Input power source
Motor type １００Ｖ／５０Ｈｚ １００Ｖ／６０Ｈｚ Power
Power Rated Power Rated source
consump. current consump. current poles
（Ｗ） （Ａ） （Ｗ） （Ａ）
NA100-550F-20H ５６ ０．９６ ５４ ０．８６ 1Φ 4Ｐ

Input power source

Motor type ４００Ｖ／５０Ｈｚ ４００Ｖ／６０Ｈｚ Power
Power Rated Power Rated source
consump. current consump. current poles
（Ｗ） （Ａ） （Ｗ） （Ａ）
NA100-750F-20H １５０ １．０ １８０ ０．８２ 3Φ 2Ｐ
NA100-1100F-20H/-10H １５０ １．０ １８０ ０．８２
NA20-1500-20H/-10H ６２０ １．０ ６５０ １．０
NA20-1800-20H ６２０ １．０ ６５０ １．０
NA20-2200/-10H ６２０ １．０ ６５０ １．０
NA20-2700/-10H ６２０ １．０ ６５０ １．０
NA20-3700/-10H ６２０ １．０ ６５０ １．０

- 10-10 -
１０−４ Applicable Motor List
１０−４−１ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊−＊＊＊ controller

【２００Ｖ system controller applicable motor selection list】

Controller Ｐ０００ Applicable motor Peak

capasity set value Motor type Rate out. Rated speed torque
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ２１１ NA30-13F-15 ０．２ Kw １５００ rpm ３００ %
−４０１ ２１２ NA30-25F-15 ０．４ Kw １５００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：０．４ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ２２１ NA100-20F ０．６ Kw ３０００ rpm ３００ %
−８０１ ２２２ NA100-40F ０．８ Kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：０．８ｋｗ ２２３ NA100-75F-10 ０．８ Kw １０００ rpm ３００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ ２２４ NA30-50F-15 ０．８ Kw １５００ rpm ３００ %
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ２３１ NA100-75F １．５ Kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−１２２ ２３２ NA100-110F-10 １．２ Kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：１．５ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ２４１ NA100-110F ２．２ Kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−２４２ ２４２ NA100-180F-10 １．９ Kw １０００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：２．２ｋｗ ２４３ NA30-110F-15 １．６ Kw １５００ rpm ３００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ２５１ NA100-180F ３．７ Kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−４０２ ２５２ NA100-270F-10 ２．８ Kw １０００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：３．７ｋｗ ２５３ NA100-370F-10 ３．７ Kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ ２５４ NA30-180F-15 ２．８ Kw １５００ rpm ３００ %
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ０１１ NA100-180F ３．７ Kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−７５２ ０１２ NA100-270F ５．５ Kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：７．５ｋｗ ０１３ NA100-370AF ７．５ Kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ ０１４ NA100-370F-10 ３．７ Kw １０００ rpm ３００ %
０１５ NA100-550F-10 ５．５ Kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
０１６ NA100-750F-10 ７．５ Kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ０２３ NA100-270F ５．５ Kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−１１３ ０２４ NA100-550F-10 ５．５ Kw １０００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：１１ｋｗ ０２５ NA100-750F-10 ７．５ Kw １０００ rpm ２９０ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ ０２１ NA100-550AF １１ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
０２２ NA100-1100F-10 １１ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ０３４ NA100-370F ７．５ Kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %

−１５３ ０３１ NA100-750AF １５ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：１５ｋｗ ０３２ NA20-1500-10 １５ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ ０３３ NA100-550F １１ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %

ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ０４１ NA100-1100AF ２２ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %

−２２３ ０４２ NA20-2200-10 ２２ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：２２ｋｗ ０４３ NA100-750F １５ kw ２０００ rpm ２９０ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ０５１ NA20-1500 ３０ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−３０３ ０５２ NA20-2700-10 ３０ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：３０ｋｗ ０５３ NA100-1100F ２２ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｍ＊ ０６１ NA20-1800 ３７ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−３７３ ０６２ NA20-3700-10 ３７ kw １０００ rpm １９０ %
Capacity：３７ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ

- 10-11 -
１０−４−２ ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊−＊＊＊ controller

【２００Ｖ system controller applicable motor selection list】

Controller Ｐ０００ Applicable motor Peak

capasity set value Motor type Rate out. Rated speed torque
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ５５１ NA720-122 １．２ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−１２２
Capacity１．２ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ５７１ NA720-182 １．８ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−２４２ ５７２ NA720-242 ２．４ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：２．４ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ５８１ NA720-372 ３．７ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−４０２ ５８２ NA720-402 ４．０ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：４．０ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ７０１ NA720-372 ３．７ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−７５２ ７０２ NA720-402 ４．０ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
Capacity：７．５ｋｗ ７０３ NA720-552 ５．５ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
In.voltage：２００Ｖ ７０４ NA720-752 ７．５ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %

ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ７１１ NA720-552 ５．５ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %

−１１３ ７１２ NA720-113 １１ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：１１ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ７２１ NA720-752 ７．５ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
−１５３ ７２２ NA720-153 １５ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：１５ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＳ＊＊Ｍ＊ ７３１ NA720-223 ２２ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−２２３
Capacity：２２ｋｗ
In.voltage：２００Ｖ

- 10-12 -
１０−４−３ ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊−＊＊＊ controller

【４００Ｖ system controller applicable motor selection list】

Controller Ｐ０００ Applicable motor Peak

capasity set value Motor type Rate out. Rated speed torque
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊ １２１ NA100-550F-20H １１ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−１１３ １２２ NA100-1100F-10H １１ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：１１ｋｗ １２３ NA100-550F-20H １１ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
In.voltage：４００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊ １３１ NA100-750F-20H １５ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−１５３ １３２ NA20-1500-10H １５ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：１５ｋｗ
In.voltage：４００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊ １４１ NA100-1100F-20H ２２ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−２２３ １４２ NA20-2200-10H ２２ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：２２ｋｗ １４３ NA100-750F-20H １５ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
In.voltage：４００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊ １５１ NA20-1500-20H ３０ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−３０３ １５２ NA20-2700-10H ３０ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity ：３０ｋｗ １５３ NA100-1100F-20H ２２ kw ２０００ rpm ３００ %
In.voltage：４００Ｖ
ＮＣＳ−ＦＩ＊＊Ｈ＊ １６１ NA20-1800-20H ３７ kw ２０００ rpm ２００ %
−３７３ １６２ NA20-3700-10H ３７ kw １０００ rpm ２００ %
Capacity：３７ｋｗ
In.voltage：４００Ｖ

- 10-13 -